summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/26878.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to '26878.txt')
-rw-r--r--26878.txt7135
1 files changed, 7135 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/26878.txt b/26878.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ba8553
--- /dev/null
+++ b/26878.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7135 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Repairing & Restoration of Violins, by
+Horace Petherick
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Repairing & Restoration of Violins
+ 'The Strad' Library, No. XII.
+
+Author: Horace Petherick
+
+Release Date: October 11, 2008 [EBook #26878]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RESTORATION OF VIOLINS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Ron Swanson
+
+
+
+
+
+THE REPAIRING & RESTORATION OF VIOLINS.
+
+
+
+
+PRINTED BY E. SHORE & CO.,
+3, GREEN TERRACE, ROSEBERY AVENUE, LONDON, E.C.
+
+
+
+
+[Frontispiece: HORACE PETHERICK.]
+
+
+
+
+_"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. XII._
+THE REPAIRING & RESTORATION OF VIOLINS.
+
+
+BY
+HORACE PETHERICK.
+
+_Of the Music Jury, International Inventions Exhibition South
+Kensington, 1885; International Exhibition Edinburgh, 1890; Expert in
+Law Courts, 1891; Vice-President of the Cremona Society_.
+
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY THE AUTHOR.
+
+
+
+
+London:
+THE STRAD OFFICE, 3, GREEN TERRACE, ROSEBERY AVENUE, E.C.
+D. R. DUNCAN, 186, FLEET STREET, E.C.
+
+New York:
+CHARLES SCRIBNERS' SONS, 153-157, FIFTH AVENUE
+
+1903.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+ PAGE
+CHAPTER I.--Introductory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
+
+CHAPTER II.--Slight Accidents--Modern Restorers--"Chattering"--
+ The Proper Sort of Glue--Its Preparation and Use . . . . 3
+
+CHAPTER III.--Minor Repairs--Cramps and Joints--Violin Cases--
+ Rattles and Jars--Loose Fingerboards--Atmospheric
+ Temperature--Old-Fashioned Methods of Repairing--Modern
+ Ways--A Loose Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
+
+CHAPTER IV.--Injuries to the Head or Scroll--Insertion of Fresh
+ Wood--Colouring of White Wood--Separation of Head from
+ Peg-box and Re-joining--Stopping Material for Small Holes
+ or Fractures--The Peg-box Cracked by Pressure . . . . . . 28
+
+CHAPTER V.--Fracture of Peg-box and Shell--Chips from this
+ Part--Filling up of Same--Restoration to Original Form,
+ after Parts have been Lost--Worn Peg-holes, Re-filling or
+ Boring Same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
+
+CHAPTER VI.--Loosening of Junction of Graft with Peg-box, and
+ Refixing Same--Grafting, Different Methods of Performing
+ this--Lengthening the Neck--Old and Modern Method--Renewal
+ of Same--Inclination of Neck and Fingerboard with Regard
+ to the Bridge--Height of Latter, and Reason for It . . . 58
+
+CHAPTER VII.--Finishing the Fingerboard--Fixing the Nut--Size
+ and Position of Grooves for the Strings--Filing Down the
+ Graft--Smoothing, Colouring, and Varnishing Same . . . . 84
+
+CHAPTER VIII.--Injuries that can be Repaired from the Outside--
+ Insertion of Fresh Wood in Fracture of the Ribs--The
+ Effects of Climate on the Glue in Violins . . . . . . . . 92
+
+CHAPTER IX.--The Glue Used by the Early Italian Makers--
+ Insertion of Pieces of Wood for Repairing Lost Parts--
+ Replacing Lost Rib and Repairing Interior without Opening
+ when Possible--Securing Loose Lower Rib to End Block--
+ Different Methods--Treatment of Worm-holes--Fixing on
+ Graft on Neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
+
+CHAPTER X.--Ways of Removing the Upper Table and the Neck--
+ Cleansing the Interior--Preservation of the Original
+ Label--Closing of Cracks in Upper Table . . . . . . . . . 114
+
+CHAPTER XI.--Getting Parts Together that apparently do not
+ Fit--The use of Benzine or Turpentine--Treatment of
+ Warped or Twisted Lower Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
+
+CHAPTER XII.--Removal of Old Superfluous Glue by Damping--
+ Replacing Old End Blocks by New Ones--Temporary Beams
+ and Joists Inside for Keeping Ribs, etc., in Position
+ while Freshly Glued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
+
+CHAPTER XIII.--Re-opening the Back to Correct the Badly
+ Repaired Joint--A Few Words on Studs--Filling Up Spaces
+ left by Lost Splinters--Matching Wood for Large Cracks,
+ etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
+
+CHAPTER XIV.--Repairing Lost Portions--Margins of Sound Holes--
+ Matching the Grain--Fixing and Finishing Off--Replacing
+ with Fresh Wood Large Portions of Upper Table--Lost Parts
+ of Purfling--Restoring It with Old Stuff . . . . . . . . 155
+
+CHAPTER XV.--Repairs to Purfling (continued)--Filling up an
+ Opening Extending to the Whole Length of the Violin--
+ Fitting the Core--Fixing it in Position and Retaining it
+ There--Finishing the Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
+
+CHAPTER XVI.--Repairing Undertaken by People in Business not
+ connected with that of Bowed Instruments--Removal of a
+ Fixed Sound Post--Fitting a Fresh Part of Worm-Eaten Rib--
+ Bringing Together the Loosened Joint of the Back Without
+ Opening the Violin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
+
+CHAPTER XVII.--Insertion of Studs along the Joint Inside
+ without Opening the Violin--Lining or Veneering a Thin
+ Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.--The Bar in Olden Times--The Modern One--The
+ Operation of Fitting and Fixing the Bar--Closing and
+ Completion of the Repairs--Varnishing of the Repaired
+ Parts having Fresh Wood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+An ancient writer once asserted that "of making many books there is
+no end"; had the violin been invented and used as far back as his day
+he might have added, "and of repairs to violins," inasmuch as the number,
+nature, and variety of the damages that constantly occur and find their
+way into the presence of the repairer, are such as could not be counted
+and seemingly are endless. The readers of the following pages will
+therefore not expect to find every possible ailment to which the violin
+is liable, mentioned and its appropriate remedy marked out. If the more
+minute kinds of injuries are endless, they may yet be generalised under
+a limited number of headings, or in groups. It is with the hope that
+a sufficient number has been treated of, and the way of meeting
+difficulties pointed out plainly enough to enable the intending
+practitioner to follow on in the same lines, that this work is placed
+before the public. All the repairings referred to, have, with the
+accompanying annoyances and pleasures, been gone through by myself,
+and therefore the present little work may be taken as the result of
+personal experience and it is hoped may be acceptable to the readers.
+
+H. PETHERICK.
+_July, 1903_.
+
+
+
+
+The Repairing and Restoration of Violins.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+INTRODUCTORY.
+
+
+The art of the old liutaro of Italy may be said to have become during
+the last two or three centuries, identified with the art of
+constructing such musical instruments as are played with the bow.
+
+As was the case with other and kindred arts, that of violin making had
+its rise in one of the old cities of Italy, where from small beginnings
+it gradually spread to other places and over the borders, until there
+are very few places of importance where it was not practised with some
+degree of success, commercially if not artistically and acoustically
+considered.
+
+During the early period of the art, repairing was of a rough and ready
+kind, chiefly in connection with damages sustained under ordinary
+usage and accident; while extensive and costly renovating, such as is
+so frequently undertaken at the present day, must have been of rare
+occurrence, for the reason that it was then quite possible to get equal,
+sometimes better, quality in quite new instruments which were being
+sent forth every day by the resident makers. With the onward march of
+time this has been changed; the art of the Italian liutaro having
+reached its climax some century and a half back, the masterpieces
+executed during that time are gradually diminishing in number and
+cannot be replaced by instruments having a sufficiently high degree
+of excellence; naturally enough the skill of the repairer has been more
+and more in requisition, so much so, that many who have shown
+exceptional ability for this kind of work have achieved a reputation
+for it alone, among the large circle of dealers in the principal cities
+of Europe. The necessities of the time have thus brought into
+prominence a modification of the art of the old Italian liutaro, in
+which there has to be displayed much more mechanical ingenuity if with
+very little or no originality; the high class of artisan has become
+strongly in evidence, while the artist has disappeared. It was in the
+consideration of these facts that the idea was first suggested that
+a work treating of the general methods adopted by professional
+restorers for important work, coupled with helpful hints in the
+management of minor injuries, would be interesting and acceptable to
+amateur as well as professional repairers, besides the numerous
+readers of THE STRAD, in the pages of which the following chapters were
+first issued.
+
+In sending out the matter in book form, some alterations and additions
+have been, as usual, found advisable for completeness. All readers
+readily admit the impossibility of touching upon one half of the
+various accidents and ailments to which a violin is liable during its
+usually long life; the most likely ones have therefore been taken, and
+it is hoped that the suggested treatment of these cases may enable the
+repairer to become sufficiently adept for undertaking such others,
+serious, or slight, as may not have been here referred to.
+
+Further, the author is hopeful that those readers who may feel
+indisposed themselves to put into practice the various hints,
+instruction, or advice, will be enabled by knowing how good repairing
+is carried out, to select the proper kind of person into whose hands
+they can safely intrust their cherished instruments.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+SLIGHT ACCIDENTS--MODERN RESTORERS--"CHATTERING"--THE PROPER SORT OF
+GLUE--ITS PREPARATION AND USE.
+
+
+Under the above title (dry and unpalatable as the subject may seem at
+first sight to many) it is proposed to bring before the reader some
+deductions from observations in general, and particulars in detail
+that may be interesting as to the past, and suggestive as to the future.
+In the first place, the simple art of repairing a violin--and as for
+that, anything that has been fractured by accident or intent--will be
+in the minds of many associated with the presence of some strong glue
+or adhesive material, the right pieces to be attached, neatly or not,
+as the skill or experience of the repairer may be sufficient or
+available.
+
+The nose or limb of a marble statue knocked off and lying in close
+proximity to the main body may be thought to give little or no trouble
+further than the collection of the fragments, the ascertaining of their
+original relationship, the spreading of a sufficient amount of strong
+cement over the raw surface and then pressing accurately into position;
+easy work to a person endowed with average powers of mechanical
+adaptation, under circumstances where the materials being of an
+unyielding nature retain their form for any length of time. But if any
+parts are lost different faculties and powers educated for the work
+are requisite and brought to bear on the subject. The additions,
+besides the estimated proportions and form, must necessarily be
+composed of material differing in age, perhaps in quality, even when
+of the same supposed class as the original, and make further demands
+on the trained eye, both for discrimination of material and
+appropriateness for the work in hand. There will be lastly, but not
+least, the art of imitating old work, the consideration how far to go
+and when to stop in the dressing up of new bodies in an old guise so
+as to produce harmony of effect generally, and where possible in minute
+detail. Thus far concerning the repair or restoration of objects of
+art made from rigid materials, including hard wood carving.
+
+Much ability, energy and patience have been expended on the reparation
+of ancient art work in which materials of various degrees of hardness
+and texture have been employed, and which require the attention of a
+restorer of extended knowledge and mechanical dexterity. There is in
+connection with all of this a kind of law keeping pace with the
+necessities of the hour. If the works of art of a perishable nature
+become recognised as more and more valuable during the onward march
+of time, they receive proportional attention from upper-class or
+highly skilled workmen. A costly work of art in need of repair or
+restoration is placed in the hands of an artificer whose reputation
+warrants the confidence of the owner. The works of art, however, with
+which our subject is connected, differ in important particulars from
+those for which gratification of the senses is to be favoured solely
+through the medium of the eye; they not only frequently demand the
+exercise of mechanical ingenuity of no mean order for purposes of
+restoration in regard to general appearance, but further and
+additionally, the no less important details concerned in a renewal,
+so far as may be possible, of their powers for the exhibition of
+acoustical properties such as were implanted in them by their original
+constructors. In the instance of a re-uniting of separated pieces, the
+insertion of fresh material to fill up spaces that must not be left
+open, strengthening, or even renewal of such parts as may have become
+worn away or--as is too often met with--"honey-combed" from the inroads
+of those vandals of all time known as "the worm," all the supporting,
+rebuilding of the interior and re-decoration of the exterior must be
+taken chiefly as means to an end, that of the resumption of its rightful
+position among friends or rivals in the same line.
+
+This restitution becomes of increasing importance and necessity every
+day, a condition arising from the verdict emphatically given by his
+majesty the public that there are not any instruments of the violin
+family ready to take the place--that is, worthily--of those made by
+the principal masters of Italy during the two hundred odd years before
+the commencement of the nineteenth century, and also that there does
+not seem to be much probability of others arising at least for a few
+generations to come. No wonder then that the most energetic searching
+has been going on for a long time, not only in Italy but over the whole
+of Europe, with the hope that in some out of the way court or alley
+there may yet be reposing in obscurity some long forgotten,
+unrecognised work by an old master of the art of violin making. Should
+one be unearthed, if but a wreck of its former greatness or even a
+portion, this is not refused but eagerly grasped and placed--not yet
+in open daylight before the gaze of the world, but in the hands of a
+specialist in re-vivifying these dry bones of a bygone age,
+re-habilitating them--perhaps having by him or given him other
+portions of a similar maker, or it may be--it has sometimes
+occurred--the actual missing parts.
+
+The specialist in the repairing and restoring art is now not of the
+same class as in olden times. When the Amatis, Stradivaris, Guarneris
+and the like were being turned out one after another, there was not
+so much necessity for preserving all the pieces or splinters of
+precious pine that had been separated by the fracture of the upper table
+from any cause, there was a better remedy at hand, the nearest maker
+would naturally be sought whose reputation was possibly more than local
+and whose self confidence prompted him to make a fresh table rather
+than devote time and labour for which adequate compensation could not
+be hoped for. As a result, we frequently find old violins and their
+kindred turning up with fronts and backs which, although fitting well
+as regards size and outline, have been made by a distinctly different
+workman, in some instances equal or even superior to the originator.
+At the present day, however, this kind of restoration is much more
+rarely attempted and is not resorted to unless the damage is very
+extensive or vital portions have been irrecoverably lost.
+
+The modern maker has no longer within reach, pine with requisite
+acoustical properties, of which the old Italian masters seem to have
+had so large a store, or if not, the knowledge where to obtain it. As
+a consequence there has, in response to the pressure of necessity,
+arisen a class of workmen some of whose dexterous conversion of a mere
+bundle of splinters of an old master into the semblance of its former
+grandeur of aspect would have astonished the original designers. These
+modern restorers are not to be confounded with the minute imitators
+or forgers, than whom they are much more clever, hard-working and
+honest withal. The art of repairing and restoring has now become so
+distinct from that of making, that many in the foremost ranks in the
+increasing large army of restorers may never have made a violin
+throughout. The faculties, skill and experience directed on the
+restoration of a violin "on the sick list," differs from those
+exercised by the first constructor whose mechanical dexterity is an
+aid or secondary to other qualifications: whereas it is paramount in
+importance in the constitution of a first class repairer.
+
+The construction of a violin from beginning to end may be said to be
+an art based on certain fixed principles, not all of them known, however.
+When these are, as far as possible, acted upon by a workman of
+sufficient intelligence and training, the progress of the work may be
+considered as being in a fairly straight and open course. Not so with
+the restoration of it after fracture or loss of parts great or small,
+several different courses may be open as to treatment and this will
+be as the temperament of the restorer will suggest or the exigencies
+of the moment may demand. Temporary alleviation of symptoms--how to
+make the thing go somehow--when there is no fiddle physician within
+beck or call, is a problem frequently arising and very annoying,
+necessity then being the mother of invention, often of a most curious
+sort, as most professional repairers who have had the re-consideration
+of the matter will have impressed on their memories. Among the most
+frequent of simple ailments the fiddle tribe is subject to, is that
+known as "chattering" or jarring, caused mostly by some parts having
+become dis-united, perhaps through damp or accident sometimes of a most
+trifling nature, and which henceforth, unless remedies are at once
+applied, make themselves evident in this way, accompanying every note
+that happens to be in unison with themselves, and lending discord
+instead of harmony, expressing urgently their thirst and desire for
+a small drink from the glue pot. Not unfrequently the exact spot where
+the jarring or chattering takes place is not easy to find by mere
+examination of the exterior, especially if the separation is fresh and
+at a part where very little adhesion has taken place at any time, or
+possibly the very slight portion of glue originally placed at the time
+of construction, has, with the progress of time, gradually dried away.
+Should this have occurred at the junction of the upper or lower tables
+(most frequently the first), the sides, or ribs, the exact spot must
+be found by gently tapping all round carefully, holding the instrument
+meanwhile firmly at parts that are least likely to have become
+disconnected or that are known to be perfectly sound. The tapping or
+sounding can be done in the way usual with dealers and repairers, that
+is, by the knuckle joints of the hand rapping round the instrument,
+but this is sometimes deceptive, the tendons over the bones of the hand
+interfering and occasionally causing a double sound, and so defeating
+the efforts at discovery. A more delicate and therefore better means
+of testing is by the use of a felted hammer of the kind and size acting
+on the bass string of a grand pianoforte; this will be found very handy.
+Should the rapping or sounding all round the border not reveal any weak
+spot, we may be sure the seat of the complaint is to be sought for
+elsewhere; possibly there is looseness in the interior and therefore
+something requiring deeper consideration.
+
+We will for the present assume that there has been no uncertainty in
+locating the weakness, and that it is at the part before referred to
+as the most frequent in showing signs of disorder--the upper table
+losing its grip on the ribs. This is one of the many common ailments
+that are teazing to the violin during its troublous career; a slight
+accidental tap, or hastily putting the instrument to rest in a too
+closely fitting case being often sufficient. Sometimes, on the reverse,
+it is from being in too large a one, getting well shaken while being
+taken home after some orchestral rehearsal; the joy of having mastered
+Mozart or battered Beethoven for an evening is turned in the morning
+to grief and vexation, when in response to the gentle persuasions of
+the bow there are but chatters and jarrings. Under such circumstances
+the treatment administered by the hands of non-practical or
+inexperienced people is akin, more often than not, to that popularly
+supposed to be effectual in suppressing slight functional disorders
+of the human system; namely, a prompt and appreciable dose of medicine
+for the one, a good stuffing of thick dark glue for the other. In both
+cases it may well be said that not unfrequently "the remedy is worse
+than the disease." Glue is a good thing in its way and when properly
+applied, but not so if overdone, even if the kind is the best
+obtainable.
+
+A few remarks may here be offered as to the qualities that should be
+present in good glue, especially with regard to violin repairing. Among
+the makers of it, the glue which will absorb the largest quantity of
+water ranks as the best. It will, after proper application, resist best
+the action of moisture in the atmosphere, or in fact take longer time
+before releasing the two surfaces it may have been holding in contact.
+There is not much difficulty in getting glue very satisfactory in most
+respects--as good animals die now-a-days as ever got into the gluepots
+of the old masters--but it must be selected. That kind used extensively
+in the German manufactories is said to be a fish glue, remarkably hard,
+very light in colour and almost opaque. This is not to be recommended
+for violin repairs; it holds the parts together with such tenacity that
+fresh fractures are likely to be caused in undoing a portion, a process
+often very necessary; professional repairers will tell you "it tears
+the wood too much." The glues mostly in favour among upper class
+repairers are those known as Russian, Cologne and Isinglass, all good;
+they are light in colour, very firm, not too brittle, and transparent.
+There are other varieties to be had of excellent quality and which
+conform to the conditions required. Thick cakes of a dark brown colour
+with an unpleasant odour should be avoided; they are too easily
+affected by the atmosphere, turn bad in the gluepot under very little
+provocation from damp warm winds, and spoil the look of good and refined
+workmanship. There are many different kinds of glue sold under various
+titles, some termed "liquid glue," others cement, apparently for
+saving the very insignificant time and trouble in warming up the
+orthodox solution; but none appear satisfactory in general and many
+of them are even detestable. There are some adhesive materials used
+in India where warmth and damp have their full play and make short work
+of an old master's joints, but these cements of the Eastern Hemisphere
+are likewise unsuitable for the kind of work under consideration, as
+when once dried, being unaffected by damp to any extreme, they are of
+course difficult to remove when further repairs have become necessary.
+
+One of the special advantages of glue to the repairer is its yielding
+to the direct application of moisture, so that in future repairings
+the old stuff can be washed completely out and fresh glue used over
+clean work. Let all amateur repairers therefore, abstain from seeking
+after a vain thing of the nature of glue impervious to moisture. One
+word more, as preachers say, and that is as to the preparation or
+melting of the glue--simplest of processes--some pieces of selected
+glue put into a small glazed gallipot with two-thirds of clean water
+and left to soak during the night will only require warming in the
+morning by placing the pot in a larger one and surrounding it with hot
+water. The quantity of glue being varied according to requirement is
+far preferable to the old-fashioned iron glue-pot which darkens the
+glue and is in other ways objectionable. If the injury or want of
+adhesion extends only to a trifling distance round the edge and has
+happened at a time when good glue and proper appliances are not to hand,
+the routine pursued must still be the same as if they were: first by
+obtaining a well-worn table knife, the thinner the better (but if the
+household knives happen to be new and strong you may call on some artist
+friend, borrow his palette knife, clean it, have ready some clear water,
+a cushion or a substitute, and some rather thick gum). If time will
+allow, the strings should be taken off the violin, and then placing
+it face downwards on the cushion, the knife having been dipped in the
+water, can be inserted gently at the part requiring attention. (Diagram
+1.)
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 1.]
+
+You will soon tell by the sound in moving the knife about whether the
+separation has been recent or of long standing, if the latter, the
+slipping of the knife will cause a slight grating sound and when drawn
+out will show signs of dirt. The knife must be rinsed and re-inserted
+a sufficient number of times until all the evidence of dirt has
+disappeared, the knife coming away clean and not gritty. Care should
+be taken meanwhile to keep the violin on the tilt so that the water
+introduced on the surface of the knife does not run inside but outward
+to the edge; the parts should also each time be wiped by a clean
+absorbent piece of cotton or linen. The knife can then be charged with
+gum instead of water and inserted as before, the process being finished
+by the wiping.
+
+But now the question will arise how about the closing up and pressing
+together of the parts. For this, assuming that the part to be rejoined
+is not of great extent, the chin-rest--almost every player now uses
+one--can be applied to the part and fixed in the usual way. If there
+is not one to be had, some pieces of ordinary deal, the softer the
+better--fire wood will do--cut into shape as depicted (Diagram 2) can
+be fitted, but very loosely to allow of thin wedges being used to
+tighten the grip (Diagram 3). They must be very gently pushed in, or
+the border of the violin will be damaged. Some paper placed between
+the wedge and the border will help in preserving the latter from injury
+or marks. The above suggestions are only intended to be applicable when
+the violinist may be out of reach of any professional or competent
+repairer. Gum arabic or dextrine are not comparable with good glue for
+repairs, although with care and attention to the details enumerated
+here I have known it answer when in pressing haste, and even for a
+permanency.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 2.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 3.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+MINOR REPAIRS--CRAMPS AND JOINTS--VIOLIN CASES--RATTLES AND
+JARS--LOOSE FINGERBOARDS--ATMOSPHERIC TEMPERATURE--OLD-FASHIONED
+METHODS OF REPAIRING--MODERN WAYS--A LOOSE NUT.
+
+
+The professional repairer is of course always provided with the well
+known wooden screw cramps as used in all countries for centuries, but
+if "up to date" men, they will have affixed the modern covering of cork
+or leather at the parts coming into contact with the instrument. No
+end of damage has been done at all times by neglect of this simple
+precaution. Many gems from the old masters that would otherwise have
+been matchless, are disfigured by an array of semi-circular dents or
+bruises near the border. This is particularly noticeable when the
+arching springs rather abruptly from a narrow channel and near the
+purfling, or the rise commences from the border without channelling.
+Here is shown the wisdom of the earlier Italian masters when
+introducing the channelled model, the hollowing being a preservation
+against damage by the impetuous repairer. Many otherwise excellent
+workers are heavy handed, pressing all parts together very tightly but
+not more securely. Good joints, cleanly and accurately cut, the
+surfaces kept clean and not overloaded with good glue, are the best
+for lasting, and of course for appearance.
+
+Before leaving that part of our subject which is connected with damages
+to the violin resulting from want of precaution or thoughtlessness,
+it may be as well to refer to a frequent cause of disaster, often well
+nigh ruin, by the use of badly fitting and badly constructed cases.
+Innumerable as have been the varieties of style, shape and arrangement
+of violin cases, there is still an opportunity for a new, good and
+useful one that shall combine all or most of the requirements as regards
+utility, portability, preservativeness and nice appearance. Those in
+use for travelling with during the last century and the early part of
+this, had the disadvantage of heaviness, besides their rounded forms
+which prevented their being placed with a flat side downwards on a shelf
+or convenient horizontal surface without some unsteady rolling; also
+being often studded with brass nails like a coffin, a very grave
+objection (diagram 4). The leather cases which require the instrument
+to be placed in sideways have the advantage of giving good protection
+against rain, but there is insufficient defence against accidental
+violence; they are, further, more expensive than the foreign boxes made
+of poplar wood, which are light and of sufficient strength when
+carefully made. There was one good thing about the ancient cases,
+however, the violin being inserted at the large end, the performer knew
+at once whether the case was sufficiently capacious for the instrument.
+Not so with those in common use at the present time, opening as a box.
+To these may be laid the charge of causing an immense amount of
+irreparable injury to numbers of violins of any standard of excellence
+or costliness. This in the way mostly of depressions--"wells" as they
+are termed by repairers--where the feet of the bridge rest. These are
+caused by the lid of the case coming down on to the hard wood of the
+bridge and pressing its feet like dies, into the comparatively softer
+pine (diagram 5). It is a disfigurement to the violin and is sometimes
+in a bungling manner altered by inlaying--badly in most
+instances--square pieces of wood to bring the surface level. This kind
+of damage to the violin has been attributed to the prolonged pressure
+on the upper table by the strings being stretched up to modern pitch,
+but this is a mistake, no strings at all playable would press
+sufficiently hard and directly downwards to produce this result. The
+double-cases in use are worse than the single, as they are necessarily
+stronger and heavier. Both present the same difficulties in estimating
+whether the violin with its bridge is too high for the roof inside when
+the lid is closed. A good way of testing it is by rubbing a little soft
+white chalk over the top of the bridge and then gently shutting the
+lid down, which also should show no indisposition to do so; if on
+lifting the lid any of the white chalk is seen to have changed places
+and got on to the lining of the lid, put aside at once and for ever
+the condemned case as being an unfit receptacle for your cherished
+Cremona. Further, if the fit is at all tight, do not use pressure but
+get another case, your violin would be a very bad one indeed for your
+sympathies to fall in with a horrible suggestion once made by the maker
+of a too closely fitting case for his friend's instrument, that he
+should be allowed to take a shaving or two off the violin, it would
+then go in nicely. As some excuse for this maker he was not an amateur
+in this line, but a professional undertaker.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 4.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 5.]
+
+We may now shift our ground and notice another source of the
+complaint--rattles, jars, chatters, or grunts, which ever may appear
+the most appropriate title for another variety of annoyance to the
+performer. Having found out with our felt-headed hammer, or if that
+is not easily obtainable, a slender stick may be covered at the end
+with almost any soft material enclosed within a piece of chamois or
+soft leather, and tied so as to form a knob like a small drumstick.
+Having tested the violin with it in the manner before referred to, and
+there being no bad reports from the body of the instrument, the hurt,
+seat of injury, or lesion, may be in the neck, fingerboard, or even
+the scroll, any part being liable to give out its undesirable note,
+or interfere with the proper emission of musical tone from the strings.
+There is no portion of the violin that will not under certain
+provocations join too willingly in the production of unwelcome sounds
+if the exciting conditions are present--those of checked vibration,
+or vibration that should be checked. An unsuspected cause may be
+discovered by the tapping test to be lurking unseen, and often unfelt,
+till one note being struck in unison or sympathy with the affected spot,
+may cause it to speak in a decided manner. This is at the part where
+the fingerboard parts from the neck over the instrument towards the
+bridge--the rather thin glue, as it should be--may, through damp or
+other causes, have lost its hold for but a short distance, and not be
+evident while the fingers are pressing the strings over the part; but
+when notes are struck nearer towards the nut, the pressure is relieved
+and the fingerboard free to take its own part. This, although a trifle
+in itself, requires for its cure proper attention with suitable
+appliances.
+
+After the removal of the strings, the first suggestion naturally
+occurring will be to insert, with the blade of a knife, some glue and
+leave it to dry. This is more likely than not to make matters worse,
+as it should always be borne in mind that glued surfaces always require
+pressing together, however well they may fit. Glue contracts as it
+dries, and in the process apparently disperses and clings to any other
+bodies rather than to itself. To put this in another way, if air is
+allowed to insinuate itself between the two surfaces which it is
+desirable to bring into closest conjunction, the contraction,
+particularly if good, while in progress, will cause a separation in
+the central mass of the glue, while the two surfaces will be left as
+before, independent of each other, but more clogged. Pressure must
+therefore be invariably brought to bear behind the opposing parts, so
+as to drive out the air from between and prevent its re-admission--the
+necessity of an exact correspondence of the parts will be obvious--at
+the same time the glue is to some degree forced into the pores of the
+surfaces, and when the moisture has dispersed among the myriads of
+cells composing the structural growth of the wood and finally
+evaporates from the external ones, the glue, having hardened, will hold
+the parts together with a tenacity that can only be overcome by
+prolonged application of moisture or actual destruction of the parts.
+
+There is one very important consideration in connexion with glueing
+operations that must not at any time be lost sight of--that of
+atmospheric temperature. Much trouble may be brought about by
+inattention to this help or obstruction, for it will act both ways
+according to circumstances. In the glueing of important parts in the
+construction of pianofortes, the operators are careful to have the
+temperature of the surrounding atmosphere sufficiently elevated, as
+well as heating those portions of the structure which are to be
+accurately and lastingly joined, and particularly where hard woods and
+smooth surfaces are brought together. The violin repairer must
+strictly follow the same rule. The degree Fahrenheit at which glueing
+operations are best conducted may be roughly estimated as nearly
+seventy. The reason for this is that the nature of good glue is to
+coagulate or "set" rapidly in a cool atmosphere and in this state--not
+perceptible at once to the eye--it will resist a considerable amount
+of pressure, the surfaces that should exactly cohere, slipping aside
+and the whole work having to be done over again, perhaps with fresh
+damage.
+
+To return now to our loose fingerboard, an old fashioned and very clumsy,
+inefficient way of fastening it after glueing, was to tie some string
+round it, which of course getting much glue upon it during progress
+had, when dry, to be torn or washed off. The modern, simplest and best
+way is to have ready a soft wood mould with a square or flat back for
+the under or circular part of the neck, and a similar but flatter one
+to fit above on the fingerboard. These can be easily adjusted, and the
+requisite pressure obtained by several screw cramps along its extent
+(diagrams 6 and 7). It is not very often that the nut or small block
+over which the strings pass on to the pegs gets loose, if it does, it
+is the result of bad fitting and careless glueing. If it should happen
+to come away, wash it, and when dry see that the under part to be stuck
+to the fingerboard and the neck is quite square and level; warm it and
+apply some strong glue to the two surfaces, and also to the parts with
+which it is to come into contact, you can then place it in position;
+press down and rub backwards and forwards once or twice, then leave
+in the exact position required; if clean, accurately fitted and warmed,
+it will not require any further pressing or clamping. If this part
+should have been knocked off and lost, then a new one must be made.
+For this purpose the hardest piece of ebony you can obtain is the best;
+sometimes a nut of ivory or bone is used, but it has a staring effect,
+although if properly done as above described, it holds well and wears
+slowly. Some of the hard dark woods, cocoa wood and lignum vitae, or
+dark horn are adapted for this purpose. Rosewood is not so well suited,
+as the ruts or grooves are soon made deep by the friction of the strings
+in being wound up, and renewal is found obligatory sooner than with
+the other.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 6.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 7.]
+
+Having selected a suitable piece of wood it must be cut or planed square
+and equal in thickness. It should be as nearly the right length as
+possible before being placed permanently in position, the ends being
+very tough in cutting. If by miscalculation they are found to project
+over the width of the fingerboard, they should be--when the glue is
+quite dry--cut through with a small bow saw close up, a gentle, careful
+filing will reduce them down level with the side of the fingerboard;
+the surface should run easily with that of the peg box, which is not
+always of the same width as the other, the arching can then be proceeded
+with, a chisel being first used, then a rather close grained file for
+further levelling and the finishing off with the finest glass-paper
+or emery cloth, having a drop or two of oil in it; this will give a
+smooth, dull polish agreeable to the eye. The grooves in which the
+strings will have to rest must be marked out or pricked to measurement
+so that the spaces may appear regular when the violin is strung up.
+The distance apart being occasionally done to the caprice of the player,
+measurement should be kept of this matter of detail from some well
+regulated instrument as a standard to go by. When the exact spots for
+the grooves are marked or pricked, a very small, round or "rat-tailed"
+file may be used to work the wood down at the spot, care being taken
+that the file is constantly held in an exact line with the direction
+of the fingerboard, otherwise when strung up the appearance at the part
+will be that of distortion and the string will even be checked in its
+freedom in passing through the grooves, each of which should be made
+to receive the string not too tightly nor too loose. Of course the width
+of each groove must be in agreement with the thickness of the string,
+the widest being the D, the G a little less, the A less still and the
+E least of all; the E should be a trifle closer to the fingerboard than
+the D or G, the last, having the widest swing during play, should be
+raised further off the board than the others. The arching of that side
+of the nut may also be left a little higher. The nut should also be
+made to slant down towards the peg box (diagram 8), the grooves being
+of a regular depth on this and not deeper at the top (diagram 9). When
+all is ready for the stringing up, a soft lead pencil may be used for
+blackleading the grooves, they are otherwise liable to arrest the
+progress of the string towards the pegs when tuning up and suddenly
+letting them go with a click, making the tuning uncertain and
+difficult; if the wood is rather obstinate--it is not always alike--a
+touch of beeswax of the size of a pin's head where the lead is placed
+will be an effectual cure.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 8.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 9.]
+
+We may now leave this as finished, going to the other end of the violin
+where another nut is used for supporting the tail-string as it comes
+over to the end peg. This part is frequently done in a slovenly way,
+even by some repairers of good repute; there is no reason why it should
+not be as neatly done in all respects as any other part. It may be that
+the supposition is uppermost in the mind of the repairer that, like
+the nut at the fingerboard, the pressure of the strings will retain
+it in position. This is a mistake, there is a great pull forward,
+especially if the wood is hard and dry. The material should be selected
+for its solidity and hardness like that for the other nut. In olden
+times, say those of the early Italians, this part, owing to the small
+amount of strain in consequence of low pitch, low bridge and short neck,
+seems to have been treated with almost indifference, a very slight
+piece of ebony, cherry, pear, or other variety of hard wood found in
+Italy, sufficing for the purpose (diagram 10). It was left level with
+the surrounding soft wood, or nearly so; there was no occasion for
+raising it at the time, as the tail-string projected from the
+underneath of the tailpiece instead of that almost universally now
+known as the secret tie (diagrams 11 and 12). This latter necessitates
+the use of a higher and more substantial nut, otherwise the tailpiece
+would be close down to, if not touching, the table, causing a rattling.
+Further, in accordance with mechanical law, the strain or pull forward
+increases with the height of the nut. It is therefore obvious, that
+unless well fitted and held strongly, the nut will be liable to be
+wrenched forward out of position. This is more frequent than would be
+suspected, and is sometimes a secret source of damage or bad influence
+leading to disaster in other parts of the instrument. The same
+observations concerning the preliminaries apply to the fixing of this
+as to the other nut. The modern arrangement of the part leaves but
+little to be improved upon.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 10. OLDEST FORM OF NUT.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 11.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 12.]
+
+The length and thickness of the nut required having been determined
+upon, we will suppose ourselves in the presence of an old worthy from
+Cremona requiring a fresh attachment, the wood selected--Mauritius
+ebony for preference--and the measurement as follows, 5/16 in length
+and thickness according to the width of the border, as the nut looks
+best when the inner edge runs in a continuous line with that of the
+purfling (diagram 13). In highly finished work and when the end of the
+violin has a perceptible curve instead of being nearly straight, the
+nut should be made to follow the course of the purfling, this will
+require some care in the cutting and finishing of it. For this a piece
+of almost any veneer cut to the exact flow or drawing of the line may
+be used as a guide or template. The block from which the nut is to be
+made having been cut quite level, the line can be traced with a fine
+pointed pencil, or better, a fine pointed knife, and then shaped with
+a sharp chisel. The block or nut can now be laid on the border, care
+being taken that the tail pin comes immediately in a central position
+in relation to it, and then with the sharp pointed knife a finely cut
+line can be traced all round. The space now marked may be cleared away
+down to the top of the end block with a clean, vertical wall on three
+sides formed by the pine. If carefully done, the nut, at present only
+a solid, squared block, will fit exactly, if too tight, a little shaving
+off here and there of the pine will correct it. The nut, supposed to
+be an exact fit, may be warmed and some fairly strong glue applied
+(diagram 14). The raw surfaces of the pine and the exposed end block
+are of course very absorbent and require an extra feed or two in order
+that the final glueing of the nut and place of reception may have a
+good holding. The nut, now squeezed into position, will not require
+the clamp, but if time is no desideratum an application of that useful
+tightener will ensure a firm hold, and moreover the superfluous glue
+is forced out.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 13.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 14.]
+
+When the glue has had time to thoroughly dry and harden, the clamp may
+be released, and a part at each end of the nut marked off for levelling
+down to the surrounding forces by filing and glass-papering. The manner
+and care with which this is done declares the excellence and
+characteristics of the workman or firm by whom he is employed; almost
+every repairer or house of reputation having their individualisms in
+this respect, as also in that of the fingerboard nut (diagram 15). A
+line having been ruled with precision along the upper central part with
+the pencil or knife as before, a small gouge can be run along a hollow
+which will face the bridge. To give this the best kind of finish a piece
+of pine or soft poplar, such as is used for champagne wine cases, you
+may look out for one about Christmas time, cut it to the shape of the
+part to be finished thus (diagram 16), and with a piece of fine
+glasspaper, slightly oiled, a few rubs backwards and forwards will be
+necessary. The top of the back part can now be shaved gently down by
+a small metal plane, a little filing will give the evenness and
+rotundity required. The same treatment will be necessary for the under
+part, which in good work is a continuation of the line of the edging
+of the upper table. A section of the nut in its finished state will
+be as in diagram 17.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 15.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 16.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 17.]
+
+The whole of the surfaces may now be finished with the finest emery
+cloth and oil. This latter may be linseed, nut, poppy or castor oil
+with turpentine, but do not use sweet or olive oil, it never dries,
+but lurks about in the pores of the wood and turns rancid.
+
+Before leaving this part of the instrument, it may be as well to take
+a glance at the peg itself and its insertion at the centre underneath
+the nut. This is in no respect an unimportant detail to be seen to in
+the fitting up and regulation of a violin. In olden times the peg was
+small, not half the size of those inserted in new violins of the present
+day. The increase in the size seems to have been gradual and to
+compensate for the hard wood of the peg pressing against the inner,
+softer substance of the end block with the thin slice of maple used
+for the ribs, both being insufficient to withstand the strain of the
+tail-string. Consequently the peg is pulled upwards, sometimes
+considerably out of position. This is especially likely to occur if
+the hole has been bored too large or the peg is too thin or short. The
+accurate fitting of these should have strict attention. Some modern
+repairers, when they find that there are indications of a softer piece
+of pine than usual having been used, enlarge the hole with a tool
+specially made for the purpose, having two cutting edges, or with a
+number of grooves having sharp ridges, others a rat-tailed file. The
+latter is perhaps the best, as being less likely to split the fibres
+of the soft pine. The tool is inserted, not directly in a line pointing
+exactly midway between the upper and lower tables, but slightly upwards
+or contrary to the tendency of the peg to accommodate itself to the
+strain. When the parts under strain have settled down, the peg is seen
+to be as near as possible horizontal with the length of the violin.
+The best way, undoubtedly, is to make the peg an accurate but not too
+tight fit, it should be sufficiently long to go right through the block.
+In cases where the hole has been enlarged, badly directed or even made
+ragged by a bad tool, it should be a stopped up very carefully with
+a plug, neatly glued in, and a fresh hole bored. Sometimes this has
+proved necessary from the carelessness of the original maker. The old
+masters were not always exact with their mechanical fittings in
+connection with the violin. The moderns, for obvious reasons, have paid
+much attention to them. I remember coming across an Italian violin that
+had changed hands frequently for the asserted reason of insufficient
+tone. The maker having a renown for considerable power, it appeared
+to me that the tone was possibly there, but that from some undiscovered
+cause it was not properly emitted. On examination I found that the maker
+had joined the ribs, not at the central part as usual, but too much
+to the left, perhaps a pupil or assistant had bored the hole at the
+junction. There were besides, some tinkerings by modern regulators
+endeavouring to counteract the uneven strain over the instrument. The
+right spot, or it may be called the axis of the instrument, having been
+found, the peghole was neatly and permanently plugged, and a fresh one
+bored, which allowed the strain to be better distributed. The result
+was satisfactory and delightful; the tone of much power and purity had
+free play in manifesting itself, and the violin was enabled to take
+its rightful position among its brethren. A few words as to the right
+spot for the peghole. This was treated by many of the old Italian
+liutaros as a matter for mere guess work apparently, when there was
+no join in the upper table, nor in the lower one, sometimes the lower
+rib being continuous. The best spot, and therefore the right one, may
+be fixed upon by finding the centre between the two inner edges of the
+purfling on the upper table at the lower part, the same between that
+of the upper, and drawing a faint line through the points with a piece
+of soft white chalk cut to a point, and guided by a flexible rule or
+straight edge down to the nut. If this line does not touch at the centre
+of the nut, then the latter is out of place, and it should be rectified.
+The line should pass through the centre of the nut, and immediately
+underneath this and midway between the edges of the upper and lower
+table will be the spot for the centre of the peghole. The line thus
+made will not always be found to agree with the centre joint of the
+pine; many of the old Italian makers may have not, from lack of wood
+of the right sort and in equal widths, been able to do otherwise. At
+times it may have been carelessness. Some of their roughly made violins
+have the joint line over a quarter of an inch from the centre,
+occasionally it will be not only wider on one side than the other, but
+the thread or grain will diverge instead of running parallel with the
+centre line. The judiciousness of careful measurement for the centre,
+instead of relying on the joint line, will therefore be obvious. There
+is not much to be said in preference of one kind of hard wood over
+another for the end peg, it being a matter of fancy as to appearance.
+Ebony being black and very hard, should perhaps take the preference
+in wear, and acquiring a polish from the gentle friction it is liable
+to. The old Italian end pegs were mostly of cherrywood, with lines
+neatly turned round a centre of ivory or bone.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+INJURIES TO THE HEAD OR SCROLL--INSERTION OF FRESH WOOD--COLOURING OF
+WHITE WOOD--SEPARATION OF HEAD FROM PEG-BOX AND RE-JOINING--STOPPING
+MATERIAL FOR SMALL HOLES OR FRACTURES--THE PEG-BOX CRACKED BY PEG
+PRESSURE.
+
+
+Leaving this part now, we can turn our attention for a time to
+reparation of injury to the head or scroll. This interesting and often
+highly artistic part of the general structure of the violin, and in
+which no man since the time of the old Brescian, Gasparo da Salo, has
+succeeded in effecting any permanent change of fashion, is subject to
+as many knocks as any other part. A piece out of the ear or first turn
+from the axis is, with a delicately carved scroll, so frequently seen
+as to be almost fashionable; little pieces out of the edges further
+off from the central part, are common disfigurements. Modern vandals
+rub these parts down with a file or glasspaper, to make it nice and
+even to their vision, saving themselves time and trouble. Many a
+graceful scroll, carved with loving care and enviable dexterity by a
+master of his art, has thus come to an untimely end. Should your
+cherished Guarneri or Stradivari scroll got chipped or fractured by
+accident and the piece drop, search for it at once, and when found,
+if you have not good mechanical ability and experience in fitting such
+delicate parts, it should, while fresh and free from soiling, be
+entrusted without delay to the care of a professional repairer of
+repute, but not to a provincial amateur or rough carpenter who would
+probably make matters worse. On setting to work after a preliminary
+inspection, the careful repairer will fit the parts together as they
+are, to ascertain that there is nothing to prevent a close join of the
+surfaces, sometimes a splinter will prevent a close fit of the
+surfaces; this must be pushed into its right position or, if in the
+interior, it may be better to remove it altogether. If the part is lost,
+then the bare space must be carefully examined and the direction of
+the grain and quality of the surrounding wood matched as closely as
+possible; otherwise the most accurate fitting and finishing off will
+not make a good restoration. The repairer of experience will have at
+hand a large quantity of odds and ends of different kinds of maple,
+curled or plain; perhaps old worn out necks or otherwise useless
+fragments of relics of a bygone age, and not necessarily of musical
+instruments. But sometimes these are not to be obtained, nothing but
+new or modern wood, and it may be of good appearance and applicable
+excepting for the colour. What is to be done? There is the drawback
+to new white wood, that it is difficult to colour down to match the
+surrounding wood, when it has been fixed, and besides, if the part
+happens to be where there is any friction, the white wood soon makes
+itself apparent, if not very conspicuous. It is advantageous,
+therefore, to colour the wood artificially before placing in position.
+There have been many ways adopted at times for meeting this requirement.
+It must be remembered, however, that there is no perfectly successful
+mode of artificially colouring wood so as to defy detection, but small
+portions such as are under consideration at the present moment may be
+treated so as to look tolerably well. Firstly, a well known, often tried,
+but very bad method is to steep a piece of white new wood in a solution
+of nitric acid and water. When dry, old age will seem to have crept
+over and through it, but of a delusive and unnatural kind. The corrosive
+properties of the acid still remain and gradually disintegrate the
+fibres until the whole mass becomes rotten. It may be fairly termed
+premature old age, as the lowering or toning down of the colour in wood
+and other materials seems to be caused by similar, if not identical,
+constituents of the ordinary atmosphere, but under different
+conditions. Another way is lay the pieces of wood upon a stove with
+a regulated heating power and watching for the exact degree of change
+in the colour with continued heat. There is very little to be said
+against it for small repairs, the degree of heat required for the
+desired tint is insufficient to damage the wood but enough to harden
+it, and if not too hastily done the colouring will go quite through.
+
+Among other methods is tinting the wood by any of the various stains
+sold for the purpose. Few of them are of any good to the violin repairer,
+some choking the softer parts and leaving the harder ones or threads
+standing out lighter when they should be darker. Their colour, if it
+were not for this drawback, is sometimes good. Some of the
+manufacturers of new musical instruments on the continent lower the
+colour of the wood before varnishing by staining it with a solution
+of bichromate of potash. Sometimes when dexterously applied the colour
+is very good, but the stain is liable to make itself too evident in
+parts where the wood may be a little more spongy than at others. Most
+of the instruments treated in this way may be recognised at a glance,
+the curl of the maple is brought out strongly, in fact overdone. With
+small portions of wood for repairing this stain may, with much caution,
+be used to advantage. It has the property of throwing up the threads
+of the pine and the nutmeggy parts of the maple without impairing
+seriously the clearness of the grain under the varnish. The preparation
+of the solution is as follows--some pieces of bichromate of potash can
+be put into any ordinary bottle of a convenient size and water poured
+on to them. The water will take up a certain quantity in solution which
+will be too strong for the repairer's use; some of it, say a gill, can
+be put into an equal quantity of clear water, and then painted over
+the wood to be coloured down. There will not be any perceptible
+colouring for half-an-hour or so, but further exposure to good or
+strong sunlight will gradually bring about a change from the slight
+orange tint to the dull light brown approaching that produced by the
+slow secret process adopted by "Old Father Time." It must be kept in
+mind that bichromate of potash is a poison. There are other stains that
+will bring a good colour to the surface of the wood, but are likely
+to change colour when the varnish is applied. The whole work of careful
+restoration may thus be upset in a moment. All stains should be
+carefully and repeatedly tested before being applied to any work of
+importance. Some repairers use a hastily made solution of powdered
+colour such as burnt umber, and paint or rub it into the wood. This
+process is to be condemned as resulting in opaqueness and giving a
+tinkered aspect to the wood and work.
+
+There are doubtless many substances or liquids capable of imparting
+a tint resembling that alone caused by age, but experience only will
+enable the repairer to decide which is best. It may be as well to point
+out that some tinting substances are more suitable for colouring wood
+of a dense quality than for a more open grained or spongy one. Much
+will depend on the judgment exercised and skill in matching tints. When
+it becomes absolutely necessary to use fresh white wood, this will
+require more colouring than an older piece, but a rather strange thing
+in connection with this is that if some of the varnish has been removed
+from the parts adjacent to the freshly inserted wood, the old material
+will require colouring down as well as the new, but not so much. This
+seems like some indication that varnish does get lowered in tint as
+age progresses; it may be, however, that the top surface of the wood
+gets darker than the under parts from the action of light.
+
+The final touching up or finish of the newly inserted wood and its
+varnishing will have to remain over for the present, and will be taken
+up after the mechanical work is concluded.
+
+Having thus far got to work upon a fractured or lost piece that may
+have been knocked off a projecting part of the scroll, there are other
+injuries likely to occur to this part of the instrument and caused in
+a variety of ways, some occasionally seeming mysterious in their origin.
+Thus from a weakness or flaw in the grain of the wood, or it may be
+from a blow having first started a crack and successive ones gradually
+increasing the fracture, the scroll itself will come away bodily,
+separating at the weakest part just behind the second turn. This is
+a delicate matter for manipulation. If the fracture is quite new, the
+raw surfaces uninjured and some properly prepared rather strong glue
+is handy, then an almost instant application of it to both surfaces
+and pressing them together, exactly fitting, will result in an
+effectual and lasting junction of the parts. But supposing the breakage
+to have occurred some time back and the parts to be separate and soiled,
+the difficulties are much increased, as in the majority of cases no
+purchase can be obtained whereby a good pressure can be directly
+applied. Cramps cannot be applied, therefore, with any degree of safety,
+even if a good grip can be obtained and with the safeguard of some
+padding, as the first is bound to injure the wood around, leaving an
+ugly imprint of the grip, and thus making things worse in appearance
+instead of better. The other is likely to be productive of slipping
+out of position, the hold not being retained, and vexatious results
+ensuing with the accompaniment occasionally of unprintable language
+coming from the repairer. The best way on all occasions will be found
+to be that in which patience is not taken as a virtue but as necessity,
+and the presence of Old Father Time altogether ignored, which may often
+mean time saved. Constant practice may give facility in keeping pace
+with that steady old party with the hourglass, but a good result is
+seldom obtained when the clock is much consulted during the progress
+of the work in hand. It is this which has caused the complete ruin of
+many a damaged gem from Cremona's workshops of the olden time. We will
+therefore suppose the repairer to be unfettered by time and that he
+will be properly paid for work that will tend to restore the commercial
+value, as well as the usefulness and beauty.
+
+The main consideration will be the manner of getting a proper
+attachment of parts that cannot be wedged or forced together at once,
+in fact, to get a good purchase or leverage. This must be either
+obtained indirectly or dispensed with altogether. For the former,
+building up or "making," as it is termed, must be resorted to, and which
+may include temporarily glueing fresh wood on to the old parts to be
+separated or cut away afterwards. Many inexperienced repairers are too
+apt to look upon all glueing as for permanency, but practice should
+soon make it plain that all joinings are effected only for such length
+of time as may be desirable. In making or building up a part from which
+we can obtain a stand or commanding point from which to get a more direct
+purchase, it may be necessary to glue one or more pieces of wood, cut
+to a proper shape and stuck with a dab of thick glue and left until
+dry. For this purpose the soft white wood or poplar referred to at the
+beginning will be found useful, it is so easily cut with a chisel or
+knife keen edged--this condition is an essential at all times. By the
+bye, some readers may be thinking of the best means of getting a nice
+clean edge to their knife or chisel. There are several kinds of oilstone
+or hone in repute for giving a finishing or sharp cutting edge, England,
+America and the European continent supplying them, the "Chalney
+Forest" being the commonest known in England; the American "Arkansas"
+or "Washita" are expensive when very good, but there is nothing that
+can beat a well selected piece of "Turkey stone" with a nice even
+surface to begin with. For obtaining a clean cutting edge, a few drops
+of oil before rubbing will be sufficient. Olive or good mineral oil
+will do, the latter preferably as it gradually evaporates; whereas
+vegetable oils acquire a siccative property from contact with the
+minute particles of steel; the stone then gets clogged and unworkable
+till thoroughly cleansed. Mineral oil disappearing gradually leaves
+but little residue, which can be now and again wiped off. In cases where
+the utmost delicacy of surface cutting or close fitting is required,
+and where no other tool but the chisel can be used, it may be as well
+to have at hand a stout, smooth leather strap fixed at each end over
+a piece of wood about twelve inches in length. The residue on the Turkey
+stone can be taken off with a knife--care being taken that no dust or
+grit is with it--and smeared on the strap with a little olive oil. The
+chisel or knife used briskly and gently on this will after a few passes
+become as near perfection of keenness as possible. After getting
+everything in readiness, which will include the carving to shape, of
+any wood that is to act as a support or fulcrum, these parts must be
+made to fit as accurately as possible, and may not require glueing but
+at one or two places and those selected to come in contact with those
+of the original structure least liable to be affected or damaged. Thus
+the interior of the peg-box will be found a convenient position from
+which to build a support that shall reach up underneath the volute or
+under turn of the scroll. Having well tried the parts as to the fitting,
+the support or prop may be secured or glued in roughly to the lower
+surface of the peg-box--presuming of course that the pegs have all been
+removed--and left to dry hard. When so the parts had better be tried
+for fitting again, and if any little inaccuracy shows itself, or the
+pressure in glueing the fracture is likely to be uneven and the junction
+be untrue, a little paper or card may be inserted or even glued in
+between, or where judgment may dictate, to enable a good distribution
+of the balance of pressure necessary. There can be no certain
+description given of the size or form of the supports or made up parts
+to be temporarily fixed; all must depend upon the estimation of what
+is best to be done under the circumstances; it can be likened to
+engineering on a minute scale, quite as interesting, but less dangerous,
+while more comfortably conducted in your own home without exposure to
+the baleful influence of unsympathetic elements.
+
+The next and most necessary proceeding will be the cleansing of the
+surfaces that are to be permanently joined. In most instances the
+application of clean cold water in a sponge will be sufficient, but
+where much grime and grease have accumulated different means must be
+resorted to. Soap is not to be recommended but, and especially if the
+surfaces are irregular, some pure benzine, applied or slightly
+scrubbed in by a stiff brush, not too large, and the parts then wiped
+repeatedly on a clean cotton or other absorbent rag. Pure benzine, if
+not rubbed in too hard or too long, will not injure the adjacent varnish,
+be it the delicate film on a thousand pound gem of Cremona or the flinty
+covering of a less presumptuous output from Naples. When evaporation
+is complete, it will be so in a few minutes, some clean water brushed
+in and wiped away, will leave the surfaces in a state for receiving
+glue.
+
+The glue should be of good strength--the junction being intended to
+be permanent--and applied in a warm atmosphere or the parts warmed a
+little, as, under different conditions the glue will coagulate or "set"
+(diagram 18). When the parts are placed properly in position, and the
+outside blocks or buffers adjusted for opposing pressure, the cramps
+may be applied and screwed fairly tight. If the surfaces meet well and
+the pressure is properly distributed, the glue will ooze out at the
+juncture of the fractured parts. This can be wiped off with a cloth,
+but occasionally mended parts cannot be got at easily, if so the glue
+must be rubbed away after cramps and moulds have been removed, by a
+damp sponge or cloth and then wiped dry. Sometimes differently to the
+above mentioned simple fracture, it may be of the kind described by
+surgeons as comminuted or split into small fragments. This will be
+found to be much more troublesome than the former; after cleansing as
+usual, if the injured parts are actually separated from the main
+structure, judgment must be exercised in selecting those portions--the
+largest if possible--that when glued in, will act as a support for
+others to be afterwards inserted. The same attention in kind and amount
+will mostly bring about a satisfactory result, but frequently with this
+class of fracture minute pieces may have been lost past recovery,
+leaving a small gap here and there to be filled up somehow. These places,
+if large enough, should have pieces let in according to the manner
+before described. If they are too small for this treatment--a little
+experience will enable the eye to judge at a glance--then the only
+course will be to fill them up with some kind of paste or improvised
+mixture. For this purpose a good "stopping" must be made. This has,
+in olden times as well as the present, been a difficulty to meet. Many
+kinds of material have been used, most of them having some
+objectionable quality; some repairers keeping some kind, others
+generally making further experiments. Among the various materials
+plaster of Paris or common chalk worked up in glue has been frequently
+used; it is certainly strong for some time after use, but gradually,
+as age creeps on, contraction takes place towards the central portion,
+and a small fissure all round is seen more and more evident, and which
+gets filled with grime causing a very distinct black line, which draws
+attention to the spot, the substance also being so much harder than
+the surrounding wood, gets polished with a little friction and usage
+and declares its unsympathetic nature; further, it is difficult to
+colour successfully, or even well, and for these objections it should
+never be used. Wax is another material that has been extensively in
+use among the older English repairers, but it has very little to
+recommend it except handiness, and that quality ought not to be placed
+in the balance against much more important ones. It is not easily
+colourable; with usage the top surface gets wiped off, leaving a hollow.
+Powdered wood with shellac, or the latter with some heterogeneous
+materials have also failed, as the alcoholic solution destroys the
+surrounding varnish.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 18.]
+
+Sealing wax has also in turn been used with no better result. Other
+substances are met with whose precise nature is not known, odd mixtures
+made up in a hurry at the moment of requirement, but no material or
+mixture has been found to excel that made with wood and glue. Many,
+perhaps the majority of instances in which this has been used, have
+also been failures; not from any inherent defect in the substance, but
+from lack of proper management. Different varieties of wood have been
+tried, a great drawback being the contraction when the glue dries; this
+is markedly the case when a hard wood, powdered by glass-paper, is used.
+The granulations and their hardness are also objectionable, and if
+ground up too small, contraction to a greater degree takes place, and
+the repairer's object is defeated. Long experience has shown that the
+disintegrated fibres of soft pine, not powdered, offer the best
+security against contraction, it can be made strong or weak according
+to the thickness of glue used, is always at hand, and on the whole gives
+the least trouble. It requires little or no colouring, and moreover
+approaches nearest in character--or can be made to do so--to the
+surrounding material. If there is a selection possible, the well known
+soft grained American pine should in preference be used. There is a
+good and a bad way of managing the process to ensue. To roughly seize
+a chump of wood and begin filing it away anyhow, collecting the residue
+and making a rough paste, will bring disappointment, as sure as houses
+built with wrongly mixed mortar. To put method into the matter, a piece
+of clear, knotless, soft, grained wood should be obtained and cut to
+a cylindrical form (diagram 19). A flat file of rather fine
+texture--this may be according to the size of the instrument to be
+repaired--should be worked against it at right angles. The file (not
+glass or sand-paper) must not be of the toothed kind, but grooved. The
+shower of particles sent off during the action of filing, will consist
+of a number of minute silky fibres, which, of course, must be collected
+together, placed upon a clean porcelain dish, or palette, and worked
+up with glue--strong--for filling spaces in the maple, and weaker, if
+used for the pine of the front table. It can be tucked into the crevices
+as required by the end of a small, worn, or pointed knife. Some portions
+will remain above the surface and, in fact, will not go in completely,
+owing to the fibrous, or threadiness of the mass, but this constitution
+is the safeguard against its contraction, the glue in drying clinging
+round the fibres instead of to itself. When dry and hard the projecting
+portions can be neatly levelled off. If, as will sometimes happen, a
+little hole or two can be perceived, perhaps under magnifying power,
+the process can be repeated on a minute scale. By attention to the above
+there will be but small risk of contraction, and if cleanly done there
+will not be much trouble in colouring the part to match the
+surroundings.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 19.]
+
+We can now advance another step and notice a frequently occurring
+fracture that is caused by the constant pressure and tuning up of the
+A peg, at a part which in many violins, owing to the peculiarity of
+design, is a very weak one, the grain of the wood above the peg being
+short and liable to overstraining by impetuous performers. Being one
+of the most inconvenient positions on the instrument for working upon,
+if the repairing is not effected in a methodical manner, it is nearly
+certain to come undone again. The crack is more often than not
+unperceived for a considerable time by the performer, and meanwhile
+grease and dirt work their way secretly into the pores of the wood.
+A repairer may take a glance at the state of the fracture, whip out
+some glue, paint a little on each side, wriggle the whole well at the
+risk of extending the wound, get in a little more glue, and let that
+harden under pressure from the cramps, which--unless extraordinary
+care and skill is exercised, damage other portions of the work--replace
+the peg and send the instrument home again apparently as sound as new
+(diagram 20). This treatment, if resorted to immediately after a sudden
+and clean fracture, may be effectual for some time, but if, as above
+mentioned, it has begun secretly and enlarged by degrees, the kind of
+repairing described will serve but a few turns of the peg, when crack
+it goes once more. Off to the fiddle hospital again, where it may be
+possibly subjected to a repetition of the treatment, especially if the
+owner is of an economical turn of mind as regards "bill of costs."
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 20.]
+
+Under the above circumstances of combined age and dirt, some repairers
+would dare to increase the fracture or pull the scroll quite off in
+order to get at the part, cleaning it well before glueing it on again.
+This is making things worse, particularly as this part of the violin
+is one of the most awkward at which to apply direct strong pressure
+on a good and neat junction.
+
+Sometimes the first mode is resorted to with the addition of what is
+called bushing the peg-hole, that is, after the glueing performance
+has been gone through, it will last strong enough while the hole is
+being enlarged, a cylindrical plug of wood being inserted, and glued.
+This is levelled down and re-bored, to suit the peg or a fresh smaller
+one. This treatment is to be avoided if possible, as it is accompanied
+by a more or less disfigurement of the "cheeks" of the peg-box, and
+at the best is uncertain. A much more sure and neat method is, in the
+first place to clear all dirt and grease away possible, and gently work
+some clean water into the crack, repeatedly wiping with a clean cloth.
+When sufficiently done, some strong glue may be worked in, in like
+manner, cramps and pads applied and the parts brought neatly in
+contact.
+
+When the glue is thoroughly hard and dry, on the inside of the peg box
+extending each side of the crack and beyond the peg hole, a space must
+be cut away having straight sharp sides to the depth of about 1/16 of
+an inch, perhaps a trifle less. It must be done with keen edged
+chisels--size according to requirement--and the walls made as even as
+a piece of plate glass. Sometimes, in consequence of the shortness of
+the peg box, it will be necessary to make the cut away space extend
+further upward, and into the solid part. In all instances it will test
+the mechanical dexterity and patience for cutting in confined spaces.
+When this has been accomplished to satisfaction, a piece of maple
+without curl or knot must be cut a little thicker than what has been
+removed, but as to superficial area, fitting to a hair's breadth if
+skill will allow.
+
+Some old scrolls, particularly among the old Italians, are made of
+beech or other tough woods; in these instances the material must be
+matched according to the means at the disposal of the repairer. In
+cutting the small veneer of wood to be placed in position, care should
+be taken that when fitted in, the grain should run as nearly as possible
+at right angles with that of the part to be repaired. If this is attended
+to, with all other necessary precautions, there will be little cause
+for fear of the part going bad again, in fact it should be actually
+stronger than before.
+
+It may occasionally happen that both sides of the peg-box have been
+strained and split, with accompanying conditions of previous bad
+repairing and dirt. The same treatment will suggest itself for the
+"double event" as sportsmen say. But the two fractures are really as
+easily repaired--that is, with proper care and skill--as the single
+one. This is because the same cramps can be used for joining the two
+fractures simultaneously. For this operation the cut out space
+referred to close by, if not covering the peg-hole, will have to be
+repeated on the opposite side with great exactness, so as to allow of
+a single fitting up and filling the intermediate space, the grain
+running as described before, and which will therefore be--when placed
+in position--with the end of the grain towards the spectator--looking
+towards the front of the peg-box. It should be neatly and very closely
+fitted (diagram 21). In carving the blocks that are to be used outside
+the peg-box for evenly distributing the pressure, precautions must be
+taken not to cut them of equal thickness, or when the pressure is
+applied, they are likely to slip, particularly when the peg-box
+diminishes rapidly in width under the volute. They must therefore be
+cut more or less wedge like, according to the modelling or proportion
+of the parts, so that when placed on, the screwing of the cramp will
+be direct. When this is done to satisfaction, the usual process advised
+for the glueing may be proceeded with, and being carefully seen to be
+in proper order, the cramp with pads against the outside cheeks of the
+peg-box may be screwed on rather tightly. When quite dry, the cramp
+being unscrewed, the side block of wood will be found firmly adhering,
+with the superfluous glue squeezed up from between the surfaces by the
+pressure.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 21.]
+
+The next proceeding will be to level down the projecting parts of the
+block in front, to the line of the throat. This being accomplished with
+great neatness--the line of old work and new wood being exactly level,
+a line may be drawn with a pencil or cut with the point of a knife over
+the block as a continuation of the inner surfaces of the peg-box. If
+carefully managed the knife point is preferable, a piece of stiff card
+or very thin veneer may be cut to the width, bent over and the point
+run down each side. The advantage of the knife line is that you have
+already a cut to work up to. After this the chiseling out or mortising
+can be proceeded with. The tool must be very keen edged, and as the
+cutting has in great part to be done against the grain, no violence
+must be exercised; rapidity will only come with regularity in taking
+off thin shavings. When all the surfaces have been carefully pared down
+until, as regards thickness and evenness of line and surface, the
+peg-box is just as it left the hands of the original maker, there will
+remain to be done the clearing of the wood at each of the peg-holes
+which will have been covered by the block perhaps wholly or more than
+half way. In the case of the double fracture this will be found to be
+in the same condition on both sides. The hole will require continuing
+through the fresh wood, in fact re-boring so far as this is concerned.
+It will be a more or less delicate operation to prevent splitting the
+wood, especially if from shaving down to the surrounding levels, it
+is not very stout.
+
+To guard against catastrophy, a small hole should be bored exactly in
+the centre. Particular attention must be paid to this, or the whole
+work may be spoilt and a fresh block or bushing of the hole be found
+necessary, and much of your work to be done again. The small hole may
+be drilled if you have the necessary means at hand, if not a small
+brad-awl may be used, not of the usual round kind, but square. Such
+brad-awls are, I believe, known as chairmender's brad-awls. If one
+cannot be obtained, an ordinary round one can, with a little trouble,
+be filed square. The advantage of this form of awl is that it does not
+split the wood and can be used with safety and certainty where one of
+the ordinary pattern would be certain to split and spoil the work.
+Several sizes may be used to enlarge the aperture, the square edges
+breaking away the sides without causing an extended crack in the
+direction of the grain. When sufficiently enlarged, recourse may be
+had to the rat-tailed or circular file. Here again much care must be
+taken, as the toothing of the file is arranged somewhat in the fashion
+of a screw, and if the tool is used one way it soon buries itself,
+becomes tightly wedged and will inevitably split the surrounding wood.
+It must therefore be turned in a direction that may be called backward,
+the revolutions to the left instead of to the right. It will take a
+little more time than might be expected, but the result will be more
+satisfactory, free from danger of splitting and the interior surface
+of the hole be made smooth. The use of one, a degree or two finer in
+tooth will give enough finish. A constant look out must be kept that
+the tool is working properly in the centre; should it be found working
+a little too much to one side, it must be removed and the opposite part
+gently cut away by a slender sharp knife so that the equality may be
+restored.
+
+Caution must be exercised that the action of the tool is arrested at
+the right moment, that is, when the opening made in the fresh wood is
+worked closely up to that of the old; the tool should not be allowed
+to work against the walls of the old aperture, as there is much risk
+of damage or enlargement and the necessity of a fresh peg, which is
+to be avoided, if the set of pegs have been doing their duty well and
+are free from splits. In the fitting of the peg, a degree of tightness
+into the new wood will be found advantageous; the surface being fresh
+and softer than that of the old, soon accommodates itself during the
+insertion and revolution of the peg, whereas the process will have been
+going on a long time with the old walls which have become hardened.
+After a few turns with the inserted peg, the fitting of it will have
+been tested, and if satisfactory, it may be taken out; a piece of soft
+chalk stroked down and followed by a piece of very dry old soap in the
+same manner at the parts coming into contact with the interior walls
+of the aperture and will stop any squeaking or catching. The proportion
+of soap to chalk must be varied, the one, soap, being increased
+according to the catching or jerking and lessened if there is too much
+slipping and no grip. It may be as well to note at the same time that
+the peg should be quite circular, or it will revolve by fits and starts
+notwithstanding soap and chalk, or any other mixture.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+FRACTURE OF PEG-BOX AND SHELL--CHIPS FROM THIS PART--FILLING UP OF
+SAME--RESTORATION TO ORIGINAL FORM, AFTER PARTS HAVE BEEN LOST--WORN
+PEG-HOLES, RE-FILLING OR BORING SAME.
+
+
+We may now take another degree lower down and study the treatment best
+for a fracture similar to that last described, but which, if at one
+of the lower peg-holes, may appear quite as difficult to manage, if
+not more so, as at the upper part, in consequence of the curved form
+of the shell or lowest part of the grooved back of the scroll. Firstly,
+the cleansing must be effected and drying, as previously with the upper
+fracture, bringing or pressing the parts together for testing their
+accuracy of fit. The cramp must be again brought into use. Owing to
+the wider and deeper hollowing of the back at this part and the longer
+and often very unequal continuation of the line of contour, the shell
+or tail end sometimes curling up more abruptly than usual, an increase
+in the substance of the padding against the cramp will be found
+necessary. A piece of cork cut or filed to the shape will prove handy
+and effective. The superficial area of the interior walls of this part
+of the peg-box being much greater, the thickness ditto, there is seldom
+a necessity for fitting a block of wood in the manner before mentioned,
+unless as sometimes it is found, the part has been so worm-eaten as
+to be too weak for its work of supporting the pegs and sustaining the
+strain of the strings. In that case, excision of the "honey-combed"
+part is obligatory and a slice of wood must be let in as before explained.
+Sharp shaving with a minimum of force will be required. Should the
+worm-eaten portion extend to the outsides or "cheeks" of the peg-box,
+it would be well to insert here also another slice of fresh wood as
+before, the length according to requirement, but in these instances,
+the portion of the head piece under consideration being lower down and
+broader, the grain of the inside slice may run continuously with the
+original wood. It will also be inserted first, and not until the glue
+is quite hard will the arrangements for the outer one be commenced.
+
+Especial care will be required in the management of the cramps--one
+or two may be necessary--as, if mere padding is placed between the iron
+and the wood, the latter, being in a state equivalent to rottenness,
+will be crushed together and the shape will be ruined. As a preservative
+against accident a piece of soft wood, perhaps a quarter of an inch
+in thickness, and cut in width and shape equal to that of the "cheek"
+of the peg-box, and placed over the part with a piece of paper against
+the varnished surface, will enable the rotten portion to keep its form,
+the pressure being distributed; care must be exercised in carving the
+block of wood that it reaches over and quite on to the sound parts.
+When the glue has hardened perfectly and the cramps have been removed,
+the careful shaving down and finishing of both the inner and outer
+blocks or slices may be proceeded with. If the burrowings and tortuous
+course of the obnoxious depredator give indication of its having been
+of huge proportions for its species, for these creatures vary in size
+from a small pin to nearly an eighth of an inch in diameter, and the
+tunnellings are not very close together, then pieces of fresh wood
+matched carefully and fitted in the manner before described, must be
+inserted and glued in. This will, if the wood is much riddled, be much
+like mosaic work, the fitting in of the pieces running here and there
+over the surface. The contour, however, is preserved by this treatment,
+it being difficult, unless the repairer has considerable artistic
+knowledge, to keep or reproduce the exact form if the half or more of
+the peg-box and adjacent portions are cut clean away as is often done.
+
+Scrolls of masterly design and execution are frequently met with
+mounted on a peg-box, selected or carved, without the least reference
+to the style of the original, imparting to the whole a hideously mixed
+and vulgar aspect. Save then, every morsel of the original work that
+you possibly can, especially if it be the work of old Italian makers,
+as it will be sure to have about it some points of interest, or that
+will call for your admiration of its artistic merits. Bear in mind that
+at the present day utility and low price are "to the front."
+Unfortunately for art, a very large section of the public called
+musical, ignore the artistic aspect of the violin, apart from its
+individual authorship and monetary equivalent, and think almost
+solely--not always in the right way--about its working or sounding
+capacity. To them one sort of curled heading to the peg-box is as good
+as another, if strong enough, the whole of this part of the mechanism
+being simply dedicated to the winding up of unwilling "catgut." The
+old masters, their pupils, and modern imitators, have thought
+otherwise and treated this portion of the structure as that in which
+they could concentrate much of their best artistic talent. To them it
+has been the crowning head piece of the work, and requiring for effect
+the closest attention in detail. Every part of it has received, by each
+master, a distinctive touch of tool, or conception of design, that the
+modern repairer should earnestly "read, mark, learn, and inwardly
+digest," so that if a small portion is by carelessness, or unavoidable
+accident, chipped off, the contour may not by restoration (?) be spoilt,
+or the flow of line ruinously disturbed. Some remarks might be made
+by some admirers of high finish in its simple sense, about the bold
+unfinished gouging of some of the old Italian makers, and queries
+whether the irregularities should be studiously followed up by the
+repairer, as it should unquestionably be with work of high refinement
+and minute finish. The answer is at once simple and conclusive, every
+part that can be preserved should be so, and well studied, that the
+new work may be a continuation of the old to the minutest detail, even
+to the accidental emphasis of tooling left by the maker.
+
+The fact must not be overlooked, that rough as some work looks at a
+glance, it has been, by masters of their art, properly thought out
+beforehand. Rapidity of execution, coupled with fine artistic style,
+is not to be acquired within a short space of time. In most of the
+apparently rough hewn scrolls of the Italian masters there is to be
+seen the result of experience in cutting, perhaps, hundreds of them
+previously. If we examine closely the mannerism of the different
+schools with regard to that seemingly insignificant termination of the
+back grooves called the shell; the different ways, breadths, depths
+and direction of the gouging will be found to give, not only an accurate
+indication of the country, or city, in which it was carved, but with
+it the school, or style to which the maker belonged, besides his own
+individuality. As a landmark for distinguishing these interesting
+particulars, every part of the scroll of an old master, with its
+belongings, no less than any other part of the instrument, should be
+treated by the repairer with much reverence for its age and respect
+for the talent expended on it in course of its construction. That this
+is not always acted up to I am reminded by an instance that came under
+my personal knowledge many years since.
+
+A repairer and maker of some experience was examining a violin by one
+of the old Italian makers, that had, underneath the shell a rather
+sudden demarkation at the part where the graft had been fitted in. He
+remarked to the party who brought the violin, that if it were his own,
+or had been requested to put it in good order, he would file or
+glasspaper down the edge round the lower part of the shell, so as to
+make it conform with the modern work. The violin was not entrusted to
+his care, nor do I think many others were, judging by after events.
+Trust not any violin of value or interest to this class of repairer,
+or grief will count you for its own and mortification that of the
+fiddle.
+
+Occasionally small pieces get chipped off the lower rim of the shell;
+the latter under these circumstances, as before observed, should never
+be rubbed smooth with glasspaper or cut down. It is not a difficult
+position to get at and small pieces can easily be inserted. This part
+also is so fashioned that a comparatively small loss of the edge,
+especially at the sides, will alter the whole character and reduce a
+most elegant and masterly form to that associated with mere rubbish.
+Three or four scrolls of Stradivari's are in my recollection as having
+been under such treatment and the contour being destroyed there was
+little about the general shape to remind the spectator of the beautiful
+design as it left the maker's hands. But, it may be remarked by a
+fortunate discoverer of an old gem, my Amati has lost all this part,
+cut away perhaps because of its being quite past recovery, and the
+question arises what had better be done under these circumstances? The
+answer, seek some party who has an Amati with this part perfect or in
+excellent preservation. Take some moderately firm veneer and after
+careful measurement cut pieces to fit as exactly as possible the parts
+answering to those of your own instrument that are missing. The line
+from the lowest part or edge of the shell and reaching right over the
+top of the scroll will require earnest attention and accurate fitting.
+For the next stage the pegs must be taken out as a matter of course.
+Number each one with a pencil for identification when reinserting; lay
+a piece of veneer flat on the outside of the peg-box reaching up a little
+past the top of the scroll; to do this nicely a segment should be cut
+away where the volute intervenes, and with the pencil, mark carefully
+on each side a line neatly against the back and front. With a sharp,
+narrow knife cut away the veneer up to the outside of the line, leaving,
+if cleanly done, an exact pattern of the throat or exterior of the
+peg-box (diagram 22). Next, as the veneer will not bend sufficiently,
+cut a piece of rather stout paper, and after laying it against the back
+of the scroll, a rough tracing can be made and cut to exactness by
+degrees, trying it against the model and correcting until satisfactory.
+As this part of an Italian violin is not cut so mechanically as many
+people imagine, another and perhaps quicker way, if means are to hand,
+is to use thin paper and with some heelball, used by shoemakers, rub
+the edges that may be felt through and under the paper held in position
+against it. If the paper is kept from shifting a very good clear line
+can be obtained. The process may be adopted for the other parts instead
+of using the veneer, the latter would, however, be useful as a permanent
+guide or template, keeping its shape. This would not apply of course
+to tracing of the back part, which must of necessity be of a material
+that will bend or fold over.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 22.]
+
+Having procured a piece of sycamore, very old if possible, and with
+the closest resemblance in curl, texture and colour to the scroll to
+which it is to be attached; it must be squared up and made equal so
+that the tracings of the two sides of the throat may be placed in
+position and transferred. This must be done so accurately that the new
+throat shall not be out of the square or twisted. More, of course, will
+be traced down than will be actually left, the reason will soon be
+perceptible. If the tracing is clear and well defined it will not
+require touching; but if any part is not well brought up, it may be
+made sufficiently so by carefully running a pencilled line over the
+fainter one. The next step will be to get rid of the superfluous wood.
+This will be most readily done by a bow-saw after securing the block
+of wood in a vice, if these are not within reach, it can be done at
+a sawing mill where steam saws of different sizes and degrees of tooth
+are ready at a moment's notice and the removal of any sized masses of
+wood hard or soft is effected with remarkable precision and rapidity.
+
+When the sawing is complete, the fining down, or smoothing of the sawn
+surfaces may be proceeded with. This may be done with a file, having
+one side curved, the other flat, and of rather fine tooth; a glass
+papering will then complete the process so far as the profile view is
+concerned. Further progress will be made when the tracing of the back
+is transferred, the paper pattern being laid, or wrapped round, after
+being accurately adjusted.
+
+The outside wood can be removed in the same manner as last described,
+with the finishing, or semi-polishing to the required degree. There
+will be thus cut out a replica in the solid or uncarved state of the
+whole of the part adjoining the scroll and downwards, which will be
+ready for the further process of joining on to the scroll itself. To
+this end, the surfaces that are to be glued together at the junction
+will have to be got into proper shape and condition, that is, both
+pieces must have flat faces, that when put together, will allow the
+line at the top of the scroll to run continuously and truly as if forming
+an original carved homogeneous work. The faces must be cut by a very
+sharp chisel, until fitting as nearly air-tight as possible. For highly
+finishing off these parts a small steel scraper should be used and
+turned round, working it in several directions. If the scraper is quite
+straight and sharp, it will with gentle handling bring the surfaces
+very flat, no movement or wriggling being perceptible when placed
+together, or there may be in very good work a slight kind of suction
+by the air being driven out from between them. The work will be then
+ready for glueing. The wood should be quite warm, the glue fresh and
+strong. A few seconds or so may be well spent in brushing or working
+the glue into the pores of the two surfaces to be opposed. If they are
+as perfect, or true as possible, a little rubbing together will be
+sufficient for an effectual and lasting junction without the use of
+cramps; but if there is any doubt on the subject, then the process
+described previously for joining the parts together after fracture had
+better be gone through.
+
+When the whole is thoroughly dried and the glue which has exuded from
+between the opposing surfaces has been cut or chipped away, the gouging
+of the grooves down the back may be commenced, care being taken to
+follow the lines from the scroll downwards and gradually finishing
+backwards and forwards according to the grain. Different sized gouges
+will, of course, be required for this work, according to the fashion
+or type of the violin. A glass papering of the parts will complete the
+matter so far as the exterior is concerned. Some restorers might
+recommend the glueing on of the scroll to be proceeded with earlier,
+or before the block has been finally reduced and cut to shape. There
+is not very much preference one way or the other; in the one above
+detailed we avoid the risk of fresh damage to the scroll while sawing
+and cutting, the rough or more violent tooling being done before the
+junction is effected. It would be as well to let the new wood be of
+full measurement to allow of fining down the new surface to meet that
+of the old, which may possibly have some lustrous varnish upon it, and
+which every good restorer would do his utmost to preserve. After this
+is all satisfactorily done, the lines may be traced which are to act
+as guides for the hollowing of the peg-box.
+
+For this purpose a rather small chisel of the kind known among cabinet
+makers as a mortising chisel will be required. Gently and by degrees
+the mass of superfluous maple will have to be removed. It must be borne
+in mind that maple or other tough wood will not bear the forcing that
+a piece of pine will. A hard-wood workman is essentially a man of
+degrees, the tougher the wood the less must be shaved off at a stroke.
+The strong, massive form of the mortising chisel is used in order that
+there may be as little spring as possible in it while cutting and so
+prevent a hacking of the parts instead of a clean cut surface; indeed,
+no other proportioned tool can be used with any degree of facility.
+It must not be ground to a very acute angle, or the objections that
+are sought to be avoided will reappear in another form. Great care must
+be taken that the mortising does not extend to a depth that will cause
+the back to be thin and weak. This mistake is often seen to have been
+committed in very valuable instruments, especially such as have the
+two grooves deeply modelled, or the contour downwards from the volutes
+is much indented. At times, on the other hand, sound judgment has been
+perceptibly directed to this part and instead of cutting away wood to
+allow of freedom in the winding of the strings over the pegs, the holes
+for these have been filled up and re-bored nearer to the front edges.
+Many most excellent old Italian makers seem to have been rather
+careless with regard to the exact position of the peg-holes, making
+them to be equi-distant from each other. There might have been little
+or no objection to this in the days when the strain on the pegs was
+not near what it is in the present times of very high pitch. The shaft
+of the old pegs used in Italy at the time of the great masters, was
+not half as thick as is thought expedient now. Towards the latter end
+of last century and the beginning of this, more attention was paid to
+the matter, and we accordingly find the two upper peg-holes much closer
+together and the two lower ones ditto.
+
+Concerning the refilling or "bushing" as it is termed of the peg-holes,
+a few words may not be out of place. For the purpose the holes must
+be enlarged more or less or there may not be sufficient of the new wood
+to hold together when the re-boring takes place. The cutting must be
+truly circular and very sharply done, no tearing of the wood must be
+perceptible, but a clean, almost polished surface inside. A solid
+cylinder must be cut with great exactitude, of maple or the same kind
+of wood if obtainable as the scroll. The old makers did not invariably
+use maple, perhaps being unable to obtain it in sufficient quantities
+for their business purposes. It is useless to think of cutting the
+cylinder or rod any other way than with the grain, it is seldom if ever
+done, and moreover involves an expenditure of time and labour that
+brings no adequate return. The enlargement of the hole must be effected
+by a good form of tool and this in good condition; peg-hole cutters
+and fluted rimers are sold for the purpose. When the cylindrical rod
+is cut and rounded to make an exact fit, a portion can be cut off a
+trifle longer than will be apparently necessary so as to allow of
+finishing off. If satisfactory in all respects, recourse may now be
+had as to the solution of glue, which should be quite fresh and strong,
+as this is to be for a permanency. The rod or portion should be warmed
+if the season is cold, the glue allowed to settle round for a moment
+while some should be placed on the inner surfaces of the hole in which
+the cylinder is to form a solid fixture. When inserting the cylinder
+it should be worked round a little, but not jammed in with violence.
+Your reliance in repairing must not be in force but accurate fitting.
+The opposite hole to be used for the same peg must be made and treated
+in the same manner. Some repairers, for economy of time, would make
+a fresh enlargement right through the two opposite holes and push the
+rod through both and glueing same at one process, cutting it away from
+the interior of the peg-box when the glue has hardened, but this is
+risky work. One hole is sure to be larger than the other and the fitting
+scarcely likely to be accurate both sides.
+
+When a sufficient time has elapsed for the glue to dry, a piece of hard,
+but not too thick, cardboard should have a hole made so as to allow
+of placing on the projecting part of the rod, which can be now sawn
+off close to the card. When this is completed and the card removed,
+a sharp flat chisel will then reduce it to the absolute level of the
+surrounding plain.
+
+The next stage will be that of re-boring a fresh hole in a proper
+position. This must be carefully calculated, so that when complete the
+whole of the four strings will be independent of each other, the A
+string not being in friction with that of the G or the D not touching
+the E. If this is not attended to, much trouble will be given to the
+performer, the jerking or catching of the string during the winding
+up, not being caused by any difficulties with the fitting of the peg
+itself but by the string pressing on and being checked by the peg of
+another. The boring of the fresh hole and fitting of the peg is of course
+a similar operation to that just described, with the difference that
+the peg must be more conical, whereas the plugging must be as near equal
+in diameter as possible along the whole of its length. The preparation
+of the fresh peg to fit the new hole will be already evident as to its
+requirements. There is one detail to be noticed, however, that of
+boring the hole for the reception of the string. Of course the E will
+not require so large an aperture as the D. The latter will require the
+largest aperture of the four. If this operation is not conducted in
+a methodical manner, with a proper knowledge of the best treatment
+according to the material used for the peg, splitting will ensue, which
+is trying to the temper. When a peg is once split it had better be thrown
+aside as useless, the strain on it being unsupported by the solidity
+of the material. No wooden peg that has been split in the operation
+of boring for the string should be retained. It being necessary to use
+wood of the hardest or toughest consistency, the splitting tendency
+is increased as the grain is closer. There is discussion as to the best
+material for pegs, and here in my opinion the old Italian makers were
+wise in choosing the cherry wood seemingly abundant enough at their
+command. It is not so hard and brittle as ebony. Another wood was used
+by them, a kind of dark walnut, straight in the grain, but a little
+firmer than the rose wood so fashionable at the present day, which has
+a waxy consistency but accommodates itself to the jamming by the
+impetuous amateur who will have his way.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+LOOSENING OF JUNCTION OF GRAFT WITH PEG-BOX, AND REFIXING
+SAME--GRAFTING, DIFFERENT METHODS OF PERFORMING THIS--LENGTHENING THE
+NECK--OLD AND MODERN METHOD--RENEWAL OF SAME--INCLINATION OF NECK AND
+FINGERBOARD WITH REGARD TO THE BRIDGE--HEIGHT OF LATTER, AND REASON
+FOR IT.
+
+
+In our progress downwards from the scroll and its adjoining parts,
+before quite leaving it we may refer to a disorder sometimes occurring
+when the neck is modern and grafted on to the old scroll. There are
+several ways, or fashions it may be termed, in which this is effected.
+The most usual method pursued in England and Germany is that of sawing
+the head off at a part below the end of the shell and then chiselling
+a level passage so far as a straight surface makes it necessary along
+the floor of the peg-box. The sides are treated in the same way but
+the width across diminishes as they proceed upward. The solid graft
+is shaped, inserted, and afterward hollowed, but of this more presently.
+Like all other parts of the instrument, the junction or insertion of
+the neck or graft sometimes gets loose, from bad fitting chiefly, bad
+glue or prolonged exposure to damp. When the sides or back part give
+warning that they are likely to part, they should be loosened still
+more or separated and a little clean water on a brush inserted in the
+cleft where discoverable, the parts being pressed and worked together
+until clean, for all cracked or loosened joints will be found more or
+less dirty and greasy. Some strong glue can be then worked in, both
+sides pressed together by cramps and left to dry. The backing of a flat
+piece of soft wood with an interleaving of stout paper or, better still,
+millboard, must not be forgotten. If, as sometimes happens, the
+flooring of the peg-box threatens to part from the graft in contact,
+the same course of working out dirt and inserting good glue must be
+pursued. In pressing the back or shell of the scroll, this being of
+short and sometimes abrupt hollowing, the pressure on the substance
+of the wood direct would be dangerous to its form. The fibres of the
+wood at the edge are necessarily very short and brittle. A thick piece
+of cork should, therefore, be placed between the cramp and the hollow
+grooving or shell, a small block of moderately hard wood being placed
+inside the peg-box as an opposing pad or buffer, the cramp may then
+be screwed down fairly tight. The two operations, glueing and pressing
+the side parts and that in connection with the shell, must not be
+attempted simultaneously.
+
+We may now, being on the part as it were, take up the subject of grafting
+and the different and best means of performing this somewhat exacting
+operation. Accurate calculation and sharp straight cutting are
+absolutely necessary for even moderate success in this undertaking.
+As before mentioned, there is more than one method of securing a neck
+to an old head. Each one carried out with the necessary skill and
+neatness can be made a lasting and highly finished piece of joinery.
+The mode adopted in England (see diagram 25) is the most ready and gives
+the least difficulty in a difficult undertaking. The solid end of the
+graft is chiselled or planed off to a slightly wedged form with a
+straight or square upper end which is measured to reach when inserted,
+nearly or just up to the lowest of the upper two peg-holes. Great care
+has to be taken in the cutting that the sides are equal, otherwise the
+scroll, when fitted, will look awry.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 23. Old method of lengthening neck, the dotted
+lines show it shifted forward and the part above the button cut away.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 24. Modern French method of grafting head.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 25. Modern English method of grafting head.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 26. Foreign secret method of grafting
+occasionally met with.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 27. Method occasionally met with, Italian.]
+
+Another method has been known as the French, and when neatly done is
+one of the most sparing of the old wood (see diagram 24), but it is
+beaten in this respect by another foreign method (diagram 26), which
+is less evident to the eye, although requiring more skill in accurate
+cutting and adjustment. Another yet more secret I have only seen in
+an Italian grafting, and it may be native; no join whatever is seen
+in a front view nor in the peg-box if this part is at all soiled or
+dusty, as is usually the case. This is owing to the join--there must
+be one of course--being each side at the angles formed by the walls
+of the peg-box. This is counterbalanced however by the necessary
+cutting away of the central line or ridge at the back for a considerable
+distance. If done accurately and artistically, all very well, but this
+is not likely to be always the case, although a comparatively easy bit
+of work with the original lines each side as a guide. This method of
+grafting is puzzling when successful, as little or nothing is
+perceptible from the front and not much, unless searched for, at the
+back.
+
+On measuring the different parts of an old violin in its original
+condition, we shall find the neck, taking from the edge of the upper
+shoulder of the instrument to a point where the nut is placed, to be
+not much more than four and a half inches, whereas our modern necks
+measured at the same parts would give five inches and an eighth. The
+old length taken at this part alone would give too short a fingerboard,
+causing the fingers to hamper each other, especially in the upper part
+of the register, where so many modern composers seek for effective
+passages. The neck must, therefore, to meet the requirements of the
+day, be lengthened. In the earlier part of the present century there
+was a method much in vogue for effecting this without interfering with
+the head and while keeping the greater part of the original neck
+(diagram 23). This was done by firstly removing the fingerboard,
+probably worn into ruts; the middle of the thickest or lowest part of
+the neck attached to the body had then to be loosened and removed, often
+no doubt a troublesome task owing to one, two and sometimes three nails
+being in the way, this in consequence of the habit of the old makers
+of attaching the neck with its scroll before closing up the body of
+the violin. Having accomplished this, the repairer chiselled off two
+square pieces, one on each side at the same end, and then fitted longer
+blocks with the grain running the same way. These were afterwards cut
+down to the proper form, so that the terminating part under the
+fingerboard increased the length of the neck to the modern standard.
+Of course, when fitted into the original space or socket from whence
+the neck was taken, the rounded part going to or above the button was
+now too large, this part was therefore cut, filed and finished down
+to the required size and shape.
+
+This method of lengthening the neck, however, went out of fashion as
+connoisseurs and performers, finding the old necks so frequently
+devoid of figure--the reason being probably that plain wood answered
+best for the cutting of the volutes--made the repairers remove the
+whole of the neck and substitute one of the best figure they could
+obtain.
+
+This forced fresh attention to the splicing as it is termed of the
+scroll to the neck or graft, and the method has continued to the present
+time of clearing away the whole of the neck and using handsome wood.
+Further impulse was given to the practice by the fact of the
+fingerboards put by the old makers rising so little above the body of
+the instrument. The bridge was made very low to accommodate this state
+of things. The increased rapidity of the movements of the bow from one
+string to another over the middle ones in the performance of modern
+music made a higher one absolutely imperative, as the heel of the bow
+would too frequently chip pieces from the waist curves. There were thus
+three good reasons at least for placing an entirely new neck on an old
+violin; firstly the plain wood of the original maker, shortness and
+the low angle with regard to the plane of the body.
+
+In order, therefore, that everything may be accomplished with
+sufficient exactitude, we will begin with the roughly sawn block ready
+for measuring and shaping up for its destined purpose. The scroll,
+which is to be replaced on a neck according with modern ideas, we will
+suppose to be on an Italian violin that has come down to us from the
+early part of the last century. The violin tuned up to the present
+concert pitch and music of our period having many of the modern style
+of difficulties, would prove utterly inadequate to the task of giving
+out its tones in a manner expected of it.
+
+In proceeding to work then, the workman executing this modification
+having selected his block of curled maple, planes it to an oblong of
+equal breadth. He calculates as to the best position for showing off
+the curl on each side of the neck when finished. Having decided which
+is to be the upper part or that covered by the fingerboard, this is
+planed to a good level and smoothed. A line drawn with a good pointed
+pencil or pointed knife, and sharply defined, is then drawn down the
+whole length exactly in the centre. At the end which is intended for
+the thickest to be inserted in the body of the instrument an equal width
+each side must be marked. Near the other end, at a distance that shall
+correspond with the opening of the peg-box, an equal width each side
+of the line must be marked off as at the other end. These two
+measurements will represent as nearly as possible the width of the neck
+along its course at the junction of the fingerboard. From the point
+representing the opening of the peg-box one of two lengths upwards must
+be decided upon; if the splicing is to be effected in the manner common
+in this country, a greater length will be required than for that of
+the French style. This latter is more to my fancy than the other, as
+there is less of the original wood lost. If for the former, a length
+of wood beyond the opening will be required of two inches, if for the
+latter or French a little over one inch and a half will be enough. The
+central line has of course been continued for the whole length of the
+wood. The waste wood at the end can now be sawn off down to the line.
+The next measurement will be, supposing the French style is
+adopted--that of the extreme width of the end, which will be given by
+taking a point at half the thickness of the peg-box wall at the part
+and similarly placed on the other or opposite and taking the width
+between the two. This divided equally and marked on the wood of the
+new graft each side of the central line will give the narrowest width
+of the part to be inserted in the peg-box. The outside may be then
+removed by the saw vertically. There will now be necessary the marking
+off a part on the graft that shall represent the thickness of the nut
+or the distance between the end of the fingerboard and the peg-box
+opening; the breadth across, or we may call it the length of the upper
+part of the nut, will be exactly that of and at the part where the
+opening will be made in the peg-box for the reception of the graft.
+
+The wood to be cleared away outside the lines which mark the width along
+the course of the fingerboard will be the next proceeding; it may be
+done neatly with a rather fine toothed saw and then carefully planed
+up closer to the lines, barely touching them. It is preferable to leave
+the sides for the present at right angles with the top surface, although
+they will not be kept so for long, but by thus working the measurements
+are facilitated. Going to the lower or wider end a line must be
+accurately marked quite square with the long central line, if not
+accurate the whole work will be thrown out of truth. On the sides there
+may now be marked and roughly sawn away (diagram 28) so much of the
+wood that shall leave enough for the cylindrical part that is to be
+finally rounded and finished off for handling. Care must be taken that
+the rounding commences underneath, a little away from the part that
+will be fitted into the peg-box. This of course must be according to
+measurement or template kept for the purpose if graftings are likely
+to be wanted in the future. There will now be required the marking
+of the exact form of the part that is to be inserted in the body of
+the violin, or more strictly speaking, into the upper block. This is
+done easily from a pattern cut to shape and size for instruments of
+average proportions. Sometimes, owing to the height of the ribs, the
+pattern cannot be applied so as to fit; in that case fresh lines must
+be drawn to measurement as with the central one on the fingerboard
+plane.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 28.]
+
+The line dividing the part exactly in the middle must be accurately
+done, the distance at the narrowest or lowest part that is to be glued
+on to the button carefully marked, allowing the top part when placed
+in position to be a quarter of an inch above the border (diagram 29).
+The width of the lowest portion must be mainly guided by the size of
+the button, which, although there is an average of a rough kind, is
+sometimes small, at others very wide. The width must be taken of the
+button, carefully divided into two equal parts to be marked on each
+side of the central vertical line (diagram 30). All below what is
+necessary to keep may now be cut away, the surface being kept parallel
+with the fingerboard plane. The parts outside the slanting lines may
+be hewn away, the surface running evenly with the outer lines of the
+fingerboard width so far as it extends, which will not be more than
+about an inch.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 29.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 30.]
+
+The next process will be that of excavating the part that is to receive
+the root or end of the neck. If the instrument has been accurately
+constructed with the join running down precisely in the centre, the
+line already marked on the root of the neck will be a safe guide for
+marking each side of the join the width of the portion to be cut away.
+The depth inward of the cutting should be an average of a quarter of
+an inch. In case the already excavated part in an old and much repaired
+instrument is roughly torn about and made unequal in its measurements,
+attention must be fairly directed to this part separately; that is,
+if too much wood has been cut away on one side it must be replaced by
+fresh, after clearing away irregularities in order that a good fit may
+be accomplished. The fresh wood must be neatly inserted or placed in
+position and may be held in position during the hardening of the glue
+by supports or wedges placed across from side to side. When quite fit
+by reason of its dryness, the distance from the centre must be marked
+and the fresh wood cut away to the required depth and width with a keen
+edged chisel and small shavings cut at a stroke, as there will be some
+cutting against the grain to be done besides working in a confined
+position.
+
+Great regard must be paid during the process of cutting this part that
+the corners or angles are quite cleared out, or the neck when inserted
+as a trial or rehearsal will not give a truthful report of the accuracy
+of the incisions owing to some insignificant portions sticking up and
+causing the neck to look awry. So far we may take the fitting as having
+been accurately done to the central line down the middle of the
+instrument; but now comes a further process in connection with the
+adjustment of the neck, and that is, the rise and inclination of the
+level of the fingerboard in relation to the bridge which is to be fitted
+eventually.
+
+The average--it may almost be called the standard--height of the violin
+bridge is one three-eighth inches. There are occasions when this
+measurement may be departed from, as in the instance of a high model,
+when an eighth, or even more, may be taken off with advantage. This
+must not be taken as necessary for the proper emission of the tone from
+a highly built instrument. The raising of the bridge in modern times
+is due to other causes, the most important being that of allowing better
+play or room for bowing rapidly over from side to side without rasping
+the border at the waist. It is an alteration which accompanied the
+lengthening of the neck and stop in the early part of the last century.
+
+To obtain a proper setting or inclination of the neck, several ways
+are adopted by repairers. They vary according to the kind of guide or
+pattern used. This is usually cut from a piece of hard wood, sycamore
+or pear. It is sometimes made as a double guide in the adjustment of
+both the inclination and the elevation of the under part of the
+fingerboard above the body of the instrument at the junction of the
+neck. This we will call No. 1. The other, No. 2, is similar, but has
+the height of the bridge only as a fixture, the rise of the end of the
+neck above the border being higher and lower at discretion. Another
+way, No. 3, is somewhat like No. 1, but would be used when the
+fingerboard is glued on before the setting. This should only be done
+by a fitter of some experience, as a little error in calculation is
+likely to lead to disaster. With each the application of the guide,
+or pattern, is the same, namely the testing of the exact coincidence
+of the inclination of the top surface of the bed under the fingerboard
+(diagram 31), or above the latter as shown in diagram 32. While getting
+the right inclination, in both instances it will be found necessary
+to ease the fitting of the neck into its socket, as the difference of
+the angle at which the neck is inserted causes an increase in the
+tightness of the contact of the parts. The lower part of the facing
+that is to be inserted in the socket, will have to be made to go into
+it at an angle conformable to that of the inclination or set of the
+neck. This will require executing with precision, and great care will
+have to be exercised that the squareness or rectangular disposition
+of the upper part already fitted and adjusted to the middle line down
+the instrument is not interfered with. It will be well to test this
+as the work proceeds. Some of the lower part, that coming into contact
+with the button, will have to come away in order that all parts may
+fit, and when fixed, form a homogeneous rigid part of the structure.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 31.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 32.]
+
+To ensure complete success in all the foregoing operations, every tool
+in use must be well sharpened, and all the guide lines accurately drawn.
+Part of the neck left rough and projecting beyond the button may be
+left for future manipulation, but the joints that are to receive
+glue--if done by a workman of skill and experience--will fit almost
+air tight. With regard to this, the parts likely to give the amateur
+most trouble will be the exact fitting of the flat opposing surfaces
+of the root or squared end of the neck or graft with the socket. It
+will be necessary to get a perfectly flat surface. In the first place,
+glass papering must be avoided, not from unsuitableness of material,
+for in that respect it is a temptation, but from the difficulty of
+regulating the pressure of the hand; with the exercise of the utmost
+care in handling the glass paper, even when it is backed by a piece
+of hard wood, there will be found, when the test comes, a rotundity
+of surface that was deemed impossible under the circumstances. Careful
+scraping of the surfaces must be chiefly relied on for exactness. As
+good a mode of proceeding as any is as follows--after the first roughing
+into shape and then flat chiselling has been done to as great a nicety
+as possible, all the irregularities--there are sure to be some--can
+be worked down with the edge of a straight square file, used very
+steadily and crossways repeatedly. This done sufficiently and tested
+with some hard and truly cut substance, metal preferably, will be an
+exactly flat surface for working upon the final or finished surface.
+The next thing used will be a carefully sharpened and keen edged steel
+scraper. To put this tool into proper order for the purpose, it must
+be sharpened on a hone, not exactly at right angles, as the first
+impulse would suggest. The hone, or stone, must be quite flat and unworn.
+If done carefully, a nice level edge will be perceptible along its
+course, but it is not yet at its best. Placing it on a bed of hard wood,
+or evenly shaped mass of iron, projecting over and held firmly in
+position, a good stout brad-awl may be passed along from end to end,
+keeping the awl perfectly flat on the horizontal surface. The scraper
+may now be turned over and process repeated, but not in the same manner
+or angle, for the awl will be held vertically with the handle downwards
+and firmly pressed along the edge at right angles with the horizontal
+plane, this will cause a burr right along which will have a razor-like
+sharpness and cutting power. This scraper can now be applied (not too
+heavily) over the filed down surface, and thus work down finally all
+irregularities left by the file. The adaptation of this tool will at
+once be perceptible in the fine whitish soft shavings that will come
+off during its application. A little repetition across and across
+should give an almost perfect level. Different sized scrapers may be
+used for the other surfaces where it is desirable to obtain the most
+accurate fitting. If all the processes have been properly carried out,
+the parts when tried by inserting the neck or graft for trial, should
+fit together without the slightest looseness or wriggling. They will
+now be ready for permanently glueing together.
+
+It will be seen after perusing the above that the fitting of the neck
+or graft to an old violin, well or badly preserved, is a task not to
+be overcome easily and satisfactorily without much care and no little
+practical experience.
+
+The whole of the work must be well looked over and tested as to the
+accurate fitting in all respects; nothing must be left uncertain or
+loose; in fact the flat surfaces for a perfectly successful result at
+the junction of all the parts should be as nearly as possible air-tight.
+
+Having seen that the glue of good quality is strong and clean, the
+surfaces that are to come in contact may be brushed over with it. For
+this purpose a small hog-hair brush of about three-eighths of an inch
+wide is handy. Where the grain or threads of the wood run parallel with
+the surface--this being less absorbent than the other parts,--there
+will be less painting over required, but where the grain comes end
+upwards to the surface the glue will be rapidly absorbed. The painting
+over these parts must be repeated, the glue as a matter of course being
+kept warm--all the work ditto, until absorption ceases. This is a
+matter of some importance, as in many instances joints have become
+loose or broken apart, not from the perishing of the glue or damp, but
+from the want of this precaution on the part of the repairer during
+this preliminary proceeding. It must be borne in mind that this is to
+be a permanent junction, not to come apart from any jarring or rough
+usage; it is also to be one of the most rigid, and only to be separated
+by a saw or chisel in the hands of some future repairer when it shall
+be absolutely necessary. Sufficient glue having been applied the work
+may be put aside.
+
+It will now be apparent to those who have possibly done a little glueing
+that the whole of the wetted portions have to some degree swollen, and
+therefore if the junctions were brought together they would be found
+too tight and refuse to meet. Just so; and that is one of the reasons
+for placing the work aside until the glue has dried at all the parts
+painted with it. When after a sufficient time has elapsed the work is
+examined, it will be found to have contracted to its old size and form.
+There will not be the necessity for waiting till the glue is at its
+hardest; probably time will not allow of this, some days being
+absolutely required, but it must, for the next process, be very firm
+and seemingly dried through.
+
+Examination will reveal the fact of the whole of the surfaces that have
+been wetted, being raised or roughened under the foregoing operations.
+Recourse must now be had to our small scrapers again. These will again
+be applied carefully across and across the surfaces, until, in the
+judgment of the operator, the surfaces are level and clean. Particular
+care must be taken with the edges, angles and corners, that the
+superabundant glue is removed. The right angle of the scraper will be
+used for this purpose, and should a small particle or two, at any angle
+or corner, refuse to budge at the request of such a light tool as a
+scraper, the powers of a sharp chisel must be brought to bear upon the
+subject, and the obstacle removed. Close attention should be paid to
+the above, as in the operation of first glueing, the wood, or woods,
+having unequal absorbing powers, will swell in accordance therewith,
+and upset the calculations that have been so carefully made for the
+close junction of the parts. For first rate work, the scraping must
+be so carefully and accurately done down to the surface of the different
+parts, as to leave little or no glue above the surface of the wood.
+The desired result will thus be secured, that of the pores of the wood
+being closed or filled up. For the next stage the glue will not be
+necessarily quite so strong, a degree weaker will do. Everything must
+be ready to hand, including a cramp of sufficient size and strength.
+Before proceeding further, however, the manner of the application of
+the cramp must be considered. And now, how are we to obtain a direct
+pressure of the cramp on the largest surface, and which would have to
+be in one direction, end to end of the violin, seemingly a perfectly
+impracticable matter? The answer is, it is not practicable, hence the
+above numerous injunctions as to preliminaries, and which have to do
+with counterbalancing the impossibility of direct and strong pressure.
+The only pressure that can be applied directly is that of a nearly
+perpendicular one, the cramp grasping the button from underneath, with
+a proper guard or padding of millboard, or cork, cut into shape.
+
+A full brush of glue will now be passed over the whole of the surface
+of the socket, or receptacle for the root of the neck; which latter
+must an instant after be treated in the same manner. The two must be
+treated as one operation, and in a warm atmosphere. In the summer time
+no extra precautions will be necessary; but in cool weather the strong
+glue will soon set if the parts to be operated on are not kept in close
+proximity to a heating stove, or fireplace, or the apartment kept at
+summer heat. The neck and socket being thus kept at a warm temperature,
+the former will be firmly thrust into position, and with hand pressure
+put as close as possible. The superfluous glue will ooze out all around
+at the junction of the different parts; if it does not, that will be
+a sign that there is a looseness somewhere, or the surfaces have not
+been forced together close enough. This must be seen to at once, the
+parts separated and examined. It may be that the failure has happened
+through carelessness in allowing a chip to get in, or a piece of grit
+has prevented the opposing surfaces coming together. This being
+removed by a small knife, the brush, with a little more fresh glue,
+may be passed over the surfaces again, and the fitting this time should
+be perfect. The cramp and padding should be at once placed in position
+and screwed down tightly. All glue appearing above the joints should
+be carefully wiped away with a cloth kept ready to hand for the purpose;
+it is better to do that now than have to scrape or cut it away when
+hard; it will also save time.
+
+Ample time must be allowed for the glueing to thoroughly dry. This must
+be estimated according to the conditions of the time and place. In very
+warm weather, or where the atmosphere is heated artificially, the time
+consumed in the drying and hardening is less than when the air is
+saturated with moisture.
+
+When on examination the dryness is such as will warrant the removal
+of the cramp, this can be done. If all the measurements, fitting and
+precautions have been duly attended to, the neck or graft, with its
+line in the centre--supposing the present method is that adopted before
+the fingerboard is placed in position--will form an exact continuation
+of a line down the centre of the violin. A look down from end to end,
+or placing a long straight edged rule against the line, will be a way
+of testing this: if all is correct, the line will be perfectly straight
+and not bent. Should the latter be the case, the measurements, or
+fitting, in some respects, will have been inaccurate. It would be very
+provoking to find it so after all the trouble undertaken, and many
+instances are to be seen where the work has been left in this condition,
+and the stringing up and regulation has been, not only under great
+disadvantages, but absence of comfort in playing, and indeed the proper
+emission of the tone has been sacrificed. If the violin is one that
+is worthy of being performed upon with skill, there is only one
+alternative to putting it aside as useless, that of having the neck
+sawn off and the whole process of renewal gone through, with the aim
+of next time being more careful and true.
+
+Supposing, however, the neck is truly set and all is satisfactory, the
+next stage will be the laying of the fingerboard. This should be of
+good, close and straight grained ebony, free from knots. Fingerboards
+are usually sold in the rough; that is, with the upper surface, or
+rounded part trimmed down to an approximate curve. They are cut to
+lengths of about ten inches and a half to three quarters. Should the
+violin require a fingerboard less in length than this, a small portion
+must be sawn off, preferably from the small end. Great care must be
+exercised that it is done in right angles with a central line drawn
+from end to end. As the drawing of this line would entail some trouble,
+the under, or flat surface can be placed face to face with one that
+is known to be quite true, and a line with a fine pointed pencil made,
+or better, a scratch with the point of a small knife, guided by the
+true end of the perfect one. A fine toothed and sharp saw will remove
+the unnecessary wood. In doing so, precautions must be taken against
+splintering and spoiling the wood. To prevent this, a piece of waste
+wood, cut slightly out of the square, should be placed against the stop
+of the bench, so that when the ebony is placed against it, the sawing
+can be done flush with the side of the bench. The saw should be fine,
+in good condition, and gently used, or the line made will be ragged,
+ebony being brittle and splintering stuff, requiring some humouring
+in this respect. If the sawing is accomplished neatly and vertically
+true--this last is very essential--there will be little to do in
+trimming the surface of the end that is to come against the nut when
+near completion. A piece of fine glasspaper wrapped round a squared
+piece of pine, will make a good surface. The reduction of the width
+of the fingerboard at each end will then be proceeded with. In the case
+of an old neck being retained, the width of it at each end can be taken
+by compasses and marked on the flat side of the ebony. A thin shaving
+should be allowed for in finishing off. But we are on the work of a
+new neck; therefore the marking off should be done to some general
+standard. A good one may be reckoned as follows, for a violin of
+fourteen inches long and average width--total length of fingerboard,
+exclusive of nut, ten and a half inches--greatest width, one inch and
+five-eighths, width at nut, one-sixteenth under an inch. The ebony will
+be planed neatly down, with vertical sides, to these measurements. The
+height, or rise of the sides of the fingerboard above the maple,
+three-sixteenths of an inch, which may be kept for the whole length.
+The reducing to the requisite width and depth should be done with the
+plane in good order, a metal one for this kind of work being the best.
+The surfaces that are to be glued together must now be considered. An
+untidy looking black line along the neck at the junction of the ebony
+and maple goes far to spoil the general effect; a glance at this part
+will at once be sufficient for declaring whether the neck and
+fingerboard has been fitted by a neat and competent repairer. A
+frequent cause of the dark line--it is really a want of proper fitting
+together of the parts--is the hastily planing the two
+surfaces--straight enough possibly--and delay while the glueing
+operation is in progress. The fact of ebony being almost equally
+affected by moisture as other woods--in fact, more so than some--must
+not be lost sight of. Coupled with this curling of the wood under the
+influence of damp is the want of proper regulation of the pressure after
+glueing and placing the parts in opposition. An old-fashioned method
+of uniting these parts is still pursued by some repairers--the surfaces
+are planed evenly, the glue is applied over them, they are clapped
+together and string tied tightly as possible. Diagram 7 will show a
+modern and improved method, that of a mould of soft wood for back and
+front of neck and fingerboard. In affixing the fingerboard many
+repairers have left a gouged channel reaching from the nut to the end
+or insertion of the neck. This may be seen sometimes on turning the
+part towards the light. The intention seems to be from an economical
+view, that of removing the ebony, if necessary, without injuring the
+glued surfaces by pouring a little water down the passage and waiting
+till the damp enables the fingerboard to be pulled off without fracture.
+This tedious operation is wholly unnecessary, for the time spent would
+be worth more than a new one with its trimming up. Some repairers have
+used a toothed plane on the level surfaces to enable the glue to grip
+well. This is another mistaken idea. The fingerboard should not be
+treated as a permanent part of the structure never to come undone, it
+should be so secured as to last as long as required under fair usage,
+but in case of violence it is best that it should snap clear from the
+neck than hold tight enough to distribute, or concentrate, the strain
+on other and more delicate parts of the structure. Experience has
+suggested the following as generally best for all practicable purposes.
+The surfaces having been made true under the plane--this should be
+tested before the parts are glued, when, if true, there will be no line
+or the very faintest one seen. Along the middle of the ebony a very
+shallow gouged channel may be made, about half-an-inch wide and just
+deep enough to prevent the glue from touching when the fingerboard is
+placed in position. The level across over this channel from side to
+side can be tested by a metal straight edge or truly trimmed scraper.
+Occasionally from damp or the action of the plane the surfaces of both
+maple and ebony become slightly arched; in reducing this the scraper
+may be used with good effect, and a smaller one to take the least shaving
+more off near the channel, the even pressure when applied will close
+the outer edges more effectually.
+
+The glue to be used under present circumstances should not be strong,
+and if the atmospheric temperature is below sixty, or perhaps not down
+to that, the surfaces of fingerboard and neck should be warmed. When
+all is ready, see that the ebony is placed evenly in the centre and
+then proceed to apply the cramps in the manner before described
+(diagrams 33 and 34). The one placed over the button and the arch of
+the fingerboard in opposition to it must be sufficiently large, and
+the hollowed soft wood mould, or pad, should be more highly arched than
+the fingerboard, so that when pressed down, the outer edges, and not
+the centre of the latter, should receive the greatest pressure. The
+other cramps having been screwed down under the same conditions, the
+work can be placed aside to dry and harden. When a reasonable time has
+elapsed, according to atmospheric conditions, as in cold, damp weather,
+more time should be allowed, but under all circumstances the most dry
+and sufficiently warm locality should be chosen; the cramps may be
+removed, and of course the moulds too.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 33.]
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 34.]
+
+We must now see to the working down of the graft or neck, not only to
+the requisite dimensions, but for the finish with some effort at style.
+By this last is meant such attention to evenness of contour from the
+button along to the edging of the shell, as shall be strong enough
+without looking heavy or clumsy; much of the nice appearance of this
+portion of the work depends upon the neatness of the workman. Assuming
+the button to be of the normal standard, or we may say, well calculated
+with regard to size for good effect--a good average width of this at
+the base where the curved line springs from the border is
+thirteen-sixteenths, and the projection forward--as it is not a
+geometrical curve--a half an inch. Some of the old Italian makers left
+the button very large, others small. The latter never pleases the eye
+of the connoisseur, who, accustomed to the proportion given it by the
+best masters (also the modern makers), thinks it looks poor and
+incomplete. As the neck or graft has hitherto been left but roughly
+hewn out, it will be projecting for some little distance beyond that
+which would be occupied by any button of average dimensions. Supposing
+the button to be too small, or injured, and an addition necessary, for
+the next move we shall require a pair of compasses; with these, after
+finding a centre of the segment of a circle formed by the outer edge
+of the button, with the other point find the distance inward, or the
+proper segment that is to be retained, bearing in mind that every
+possible part of the original button should be preserved; putting the
+point of the compass on the central spot as lightly as circumstances
+will allow, a thin scratched line must be made with the other point.
+Here we may remark that screw compasses should be used, so that distance
+apart of the feet may be kept rigid, as the width and the same circular
+scratch marked on the button must now be marked on a piece of maple,
+or, as is sometimes done, on ebony. The grain of either should run in
+the same direction as that of the button, or if done aslant it will
+look ugly when worn a little. The materials being matched, the fresh
+piece should be reduced in thickness to very little over that required
+for the height of the edging for the button; it should be a small cake
+of wood large enough to cover and leave a margin where it is to be
+fitted.
+
+The wood of the button outside of the scratched line will now be cut
+away down to the raw wood of the new graft; it must be done with small
+and sharp chisels, carefully paring it down, leaving the edge up to
+the scratched line quite perpendicular and smooth all round: the
+strictest attention to this is necessary, so that the fitting on of
+the fresh edging may be done with exactness. We now take up the little
+cake of ebony, or maple, as selected, with the scratched line, which
+should be made from a central point close to the edge as possible: if
+this is a difficulty, the centre may be taken further in, the circular
+line also and the superfluous wood cut away to the central point, but
+not in a way to interfere with the equipoise when the edging is placed
+on for fitting; if this is not seen to, the edging will, when finished,
+look awry. The middle within the scratched line may now be first gouged
+away and the wood cut with a sharp knife close up to and at exact right
+angles with the plane. A rounded file may with care be used to make
+a more even surface or run. If all this is done with precision, the
+parts may be tried together for testing--the glueing may be seen to
+and the cramping done, with care that the fresh portion does not slip
+during the process out of its place. Some repairers would be tempted
+to rely upon the exact fitting, and simply slide the parts together,
+squeezing them well, but this is always risky. The work may now be put
+aside to dry.
+
+The next proceeding will be that of working down or levelling both the
+ebony fingerboard and the graft, or neck. The first, in the state
+usually sold, will have an apparently well-finished off arching that
+may sometimes be near enough for letting alone after a little polishing
+down, but as a general rule it is not so, and further, if having been
+long "in stock," it may have settled down a little out of the straight
+during the seasoning process. Recourse should be had to the plane, a
+rather small metal one in good order with a keen edged iron. This must
+be closely regulated, or the surface worked upon will not be even but
+torn; hard woods, as before observed, require humouring and working
+down gently. The exact arching--in good work--of the ebony should be
+governed by a cut mould, one for each end. These may be made of some
+hard wood or metal, such as zinc, and if truly made will last any length
+of time. They should be trimmed to fit some fingerboard that has been
+ascertained to be just the thing in its arching. It may be as well to
+observe that some violinists prefer using a rather flatter fingerboard
+than others, but the medium is without doubt the best, and is not
+difficult to arrive at. The plane must be gently worked along from end
+to end of the fingerboard with as little pressure as possible,--hence
+the careful regulation and sharpness,--or you will find after a short
+time that instead of a nice even line, which must be tested from time
+to time by a straight edged rule, there will be a curved one, and this
+will necessitate further working down to the danger of losing thickness
+and sufficient strength in the ebony. If attention is paid to this,
+and a satisfactory even run of surface is obtained, glass-paper on a
+piece of straight, soft wood, but not of the finest degree, will be
+suitable for the present.
+
+We now return to the modelling of the neck from the lower part of the
+back of the scroll down to the button. This last, with its fresh edging
+or shield, will require another scratched line, making two
+semi-circular ones; it must be done from the same centre and calculated
+to allow of the wood being hewed away outside, leaving the full
+measurement when finished off.
+
+A chisel will now be brought into requisition for removing the useless
+wood outside the line last marked. The cushion or sandbag must be
+brought into use, the violin put face downwards, the fingerboard
+resting in a hollow. The neck or most convenient part for holding the
+whole with firmness must be held tightly, the chisel then worked
+downwards from the button, but not too far so as to cut into the portion
+that is to gradually enlarge, or form the quarter of a circle or the
+thickest part of the neck.
+
+We shall now use a strong coarse wood file and turn the instrument round
+and about, work away the neck until just outside of what will be left
+when the polishing down takes place.
+
+The curves should all be balanced well even while in the rough and the
+contour viewed from all points should be regular. The other end of the
+graft will require the same kind of attention, care being taken that
+too much wood is not removed. The level from each end must be seen to,
+leaving just sufficient wood to allow for fining down; the proportions
+must be well calculated, thus the upper end under the nut will be hewn
+down thinner than the part approaching the button, the line from each
+end being made quite even and the curving of the semi-circular shaft
+gradually tapering upwards. The glass-paper file before referred to
+will now come into service; it should be made of a nicely-squared plate
+of wood about six inches in length by about two and a half inches in
+width, with about one third of an inch in depth. We may call one side
+the front, the other the back; the edges of the former should be rounded
+down to a semi-circular form. All we have to do in making this useful
+file complete is to lap a piece of glasspaper of the degree of grain
+required round it, nearly meeting at what may be called the back for
+the time being. The surface with the rounded edging, or, as we have
+called it, the front, covered with rather strong grained paper, will
+be worked to make an even course all along the shaft, guarding all the
+while against working too much at one spot. The paper file may, after
+a sufficient working along the surface, be exchanged for one or two
+degrees finer, rubbing it in the same manner. For good mathematically
+even work, the graft should be turned round frequently, so that the
+light may throw up any little inaccuracies that may occur and which
+require individual attention. Here it may be remarked that if possible
+all repairing would be best done in an apartment that has as little
+reflected light as possible. The reason for this will soon be apparent
+when the fining down or polishing stage is commenced. One window, and
+that not too large, will be found advantageous. Little irregularities,
+however trifling, are best seen under such a light. Much rough work
+may very possibly be the consequence of badly-arranged light rather
+than inability or indifference of the workman. Repairs executed under
+unfavourable circumstances as above will often look very well until
+turned about in fresh and different lights, as they are sure to be,
+and then the faultiness becomes a surprise to the executant.
+
+The glasspaper filing must be continued for some time and with several
+finer degrees until the surface appears perfectly even and seemingly
+quite finished, but the stages are not yet complete.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+FINISHING THE FINGERBOARD--FIXING THE NUT--SIZE AND POSITION OF
+GROOVES FOR THE STRINGS--FILING DOWN THE GRAFT--SMOOTHING, COLOURING,
+AND VARNISHING SAME.
+
+
+We now turn our attention to the finish of the fingerboard, which must
+have its sides attended to for appearing in good trim. For making a
+nicely worked surface each side, some preparations will have to be made.
+Firstly, the nut having been cut to the width, or nearly so, of the
+narrowest end of the fingerboard and glued into position, it will have
+to be filed down to the height at which it is to remain above the end.
+The arching will have to be higher in the centre than at each side,
+in order that when the strings are drawn over tightly, the thickest,
+or D string, shall have more room to swing than the thinnest, or E.
+The arching will thus be unequal, the lowest part being at E, next a
+rise sufficiently for the A, then a further rise for the D, and
+afterwards a drop again to a little higher than the A; this will be
+enough for the swing of the G. The grooves for each of these strings
+must follow in the same order. They will not be equi-distant in one
+sense, as that would cause them to appear unequal when the strain is
+on them.
+
+Probably the best way of securing a uniform appearance and the easiest,
+after one good result, is to cut a metal template with a spike at the
+central point or middle of where the string is to rest. These points
+will be found unequal when pricked on to the surface of the nut. A very
+small, round file should now be used carefully with the run of the
+fingerboard, or the strings when wound up will look as if pulled aside
+out of the straight line. The file must be placed exactly on the spot
+that has been pricked and worked backward and forward as indicated.
+The ruts must be examined frequently for ascertaining whether they are
+sufficiently deep. The height of each rut above the fingerboard cannot
+well be given in fractions of an inch, as they must be regulated to
+the convenience of the performer. A hard, rasping, orchestral player,
+with a heavy, unsympathetic bow arm, will require the ruts higher above
+the board than a soloist of refined taste. The relative heights, one
+with another, must be the same in both cases. When the ruts are finished,
+recourse must be had to the glasspaper file again to round the top
+surface of the nut with an inclination downwards toward the peg-box.
+This is an arrangement requiring care, as, when the nut is level with
+the fingerboard, there is danger of the strings jarring. When finished
+sufficiently even the ruts may require a little further attention, as
+it is difficult to at once complete them. The two parts are perhaps
+best worked one with another, neither being finished off in one working
+and left.
+
+We may now proceed to the further progress of the sides of the
+fingerboard; this, of course, can only be done when all is settled about
+the nut, this part requiring to be a continuation, notwithstanding the
+rise upward of the line from end to end. Preparation must be made for
+guarding the upper table of the violin from injury, from slips of the
+glasspaper file during the backward and forward movement. A good way
+to prevent this is to make a millboard or thick brown paper shield with
+a part cut away to allow the neck to have a hold. By putting this over
+the upper table and underneath the fingerboard a part will project
+forward on each side of the neck; it must be held in position by one
+hand, while the other holds the paper file, which will be worked along
+the sides of the fingerboard, at the same time being held nearly
+vertical. After some little time the part where the ebony joins the
+graft will appear worked down quite smooth, some finer degrees of the
+paper will reduce the surface to almost a polish. The nut receiving
+a part of the working will now present an appearance--as regards form
+only--of having been left from a reduction of the fingerboard stopping
+short at a straight line.
+
+This part now, if the fitting of the fingerboard to the graft has been
+neatly done, will show no line of glue or joint, but simply the
+difference of material. The upper edges of the ebony may be rounded
+down along to the end, but less at the lowest.
+
+The whole affair, however, is not yet complete, as the surface to be
+varnished must be made ready for it. If left in the present condition,
+players who are very fastidious would be complaining of the work not
+standing well or deteriorating under use. The cause of this
+deterioration will be that the moisture from the hand in using this
+part of the instrument in the raw state makes the grain swell as if
+wetted; this would occur to some extent even if fully varnished. This
+must therefore be anticipated by passing a soft, fully haired and
+wetted brush, or damp sponge, over the whole of the new work. When dry
+the whole surface will appear rough, or if of soft texture, somewhat
+corrugated; this must again be levelled down with some of the finest
+glasspaper, great care being taken that all the parts, and angles
+especially, are worked over. If the corners are not equally attended
+to with the rest--and to do this properly the angle of the steel scraper
+may be used with good effect--there will be a roughness at the part
+over which the varnish will settle, become rough when dry, and give
+the appearance of untidy corners. If the scraper with right angles is
+insufficient to clear the corner satisfactorily, one with a rather
+acute angle will be found to do the work; it must be sharp, and gently
+used (or ridges small, large, or both, will become evident), working
+across first one way then the other until the appearance is quite up
+to the exactions and desire of the eye.
+
+Another wetting will be of some further benefit for a good and lasting
+surface. When dry the roughness will not be so obtrusive as in the first
+instance, and the application of the finest grain of glasspaper, or
+a piece that has been under use for some time and got a little stale
+will give the desired surface. The action of the glasspaper over the
+surface should be continued for some time, until there being less and
+less powder routed up the surface, it assumes a polished appearance,
+and if the whole work is well done it will suggest a kind of finish
+that looks too good to spoil by covering up with varnish. But the latter
+is a necessity; if not really varnish in the usual sense of the term,
+a substitute must be used, and here we touch a little upon the confines
+of fashion or individual fancy.
+
+It may not be generally known that the old Italian makers--I mention
+these as they have always been looked up to as guides for almost
+everything in connection with violin facture--varnished the whole of
+the neck--which under present circumstances we call the graft--with
+the same varnish and thickness of it as the rest of the instrument.
+We never see such a thing now, and if a maker were to send forth his
+new violins in this manner or trim, he would be looked upon as eccentric.
+Nevertheless at one time it was universal. Probably the increased
+number of movements of the hand, and especially the thumb, to meet the
+requirements of more florid execution and in connection with the growth
+of the ability among players for performing much music on the higher
+positions or shifts, showed very soon how the coloured varnish looked
+patchy under wear. This fashion of covering over the most handled part
+of the instrument with the coloured varnish then became discarded.
+
+"Appearances must be preserved" was found to be an axiom almost forced
+upon the makers and repairers, and, as time went on, the substitution
+of strongly curled wood for necks or grafts, in place of the plainer
+material hitherto used, gradually settled down into the present
+fashion. Now-a-days the skill of the repairer is exercised in the
+various treatment of this part. Players vary in their tastes or whims,
+some liking a perfectly smooth or polished surface as more suitable
+to their handling than what they understand as an unvarnished neck,
+others like it the other way as not so likely to slip, there being a
+little more hold or resistance. Anyhow, the raw wood cannot be left
+simply glass-papered, this would be speedily followed in use by an
+accumulation of dirt and grease unpleasant to the eye, and to the touch,
+clammy and unwholesome. It will therefore be as well to consider the
+two modes of treatment. In either case the parts of the graft near the
+insertion in the socket and at the other end where the peg-box is fitted
+will require varnishing down.
+
+Before active operations commence a fair examination should be made
+of the colour or complexion of the body of the violin. Very often this
+has no attention paid to it, with the result of a hideous contrast
+between the neck and the ribs adjoining, a sign of bad workmanship and
+carelessness. The materials at hand for making a good match must then
+be thought over, the most appropriate selected and the number of coats,
+if possible, determined upon. This latter will be taken in a general
+sense, as an exact number will not be possible; appearances are in this
+process deceptive and must be regulated by the exigencies of the moment,
+but what can be calculated is the question of one or two applications
+only (which would result in a cheap and common appearance) or a number
+with the same materials carefully laid to the satisfaction of the
+repairer.
+
+Without plunging into the whirlpool of the best or particular gums,
+resins and their individual mode of application, a matter that will
+take up hereafter our more undivided attention, it may be taken as a
+certainty that the varnishing materials used for the parts under
+consideration must be of an alcoholic solution, no other would "set,"
+evaporate or dry with sufficient rapidity to allow of handling: or,
+as we may put it in another way, that would lose tackiness within a
+convenient time.
+
+Most people are aware of the nature of an oil varnish during the drying
+process, there is firstly the "setting," that is, all the volatile
+particles dispersing; secondly, the real drying or hardening which
+ensues with sufficient time or age; both accompanied with some degree
+of contraction, and until the process is complete, handling or friction
+of any kind has to be carefully avoided. This will at once show its
+unsuitableness for repairs and restorations, especially of the kind
+now under consideration. The same process has to be gone through in
+the drying of a spiritous or alcoholic varnish, but it is so much the
+more rapid in consequence of there being only the alcohol to disperse,
+leaving the resin in a comparatively dry state.
+
+Colouring will be the chief consideration after the resin has been
+selected, and on this the judgment of the operator will have to be
+centred. For obtaining the effect desired or that is fashionable at
+the present day, one or two coats or paintings will be commenced at
+the corners where the graft is inserted in the upper ribs and gradually
+being thinned off as the curved part rounding upwards from the button
+dies away. Sometimes in consequence of the fresh wood appearing very
+white--it is not always possible to obtain aged wood--some colouring
+material or stain mixed with the first two wettings will subdue the
+staring aspect, this may be continued along the graft and bring up the
+figure or curl more prominently. Often between the curves each end of
+the graft repairers force very strong stain, this being sometimes
+common writing ink; when varnished over the effect is violent and
+common even when nicely done. The best that can be recommended is some
+sufficiently dark wood stain--sold at most of the oil and colourmen's
+shops--and rub it in, allowing it to dry and then finishing off as
+before described.
+
+If the neck is to be left unvarnished, as it is termed, the colouring
+and fining off can be followed with a rubbing of good oil, linseed,
+raw or boiled, it must be really rubbed in and vigorously frictioned
+up and down with a dry cloth--or after an application of the same kind
+with some old fine flannel. This will drive in the oil, consolidating
+the whole, and as it will dry inside after a time, keep a good smooth
+surface under usage.
+
+Some repairers continue to varnish or polish along the sides of the
+fingerboard to the extremity. There is no objection to this, and if
+very neatly done, the general effect is enhanced. The varnishing of
+the whole of the fingerboard is perhaps not so good in general, too
+much glare seeming to obtrude itself, but the filling up the pores with
+the varnish and then working it down to a dull surface has a good effect
+and helps in the resistance to wear. The polishing of the neck, or
+fingerboard with it, may be effected by making a small ball or dabber
+of about half an inch in diameter of fine grained flannel; this should
+be covered with another surface of closer material such as calico, but
+large enough to enclose the little bunch and to be tied up with a piece
+of string. A portion of varnish being placed ready in a smaller saucer
+or any convenient porcelain article with a shallow even bottom, the
+ball or dabber will be moistened with some linseed oil and then its
+rounded face dipped in the varnish and rubbed briskly, but lightly,
+over the surfaces to be polished. These surfaces rapidly absorb the
+polish, while the oil in the dabber allows it to pass over without
+clinging. The rubbing should be continued until a smooth, glassy
+appearance comes and you feel sure that the wood has imbibed enough
+of the polish; this treatment may be continued over all the parts at
+which it may be desirable to have an even shining surface. The work
+may now be put aside for some hours, so that the evaporating and
+hardening may take place. When this has been ascertained to be
+satisfactory, the surfaces may be wiped gently with some soft,
+absorbent material which will take away any superfluous particles of
+oil that may have been accidentally left in the process of rubbing.
+If there should be some uneven, clotted, or rough parts observable,
+a small ball or dabber made in the same way as the preceding, but used
+with spirit and oil instead of varnish, will work these down to a proper
+condition. For the dead surfacing, care must be taken that all is quite
+hard enough. Taking a small piece of flannel of fine texture doubled
+up and with its face well oiled, having some rotten-stone powder at
+hand, dip in the latter and rub as before lightly round and round over
+the parts to be dead polished; this will give a nice refined, even
+appearance, with comparatively little glare. A final wipe off with a
+soft cloth as before, will bring matters to a conclusion.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+INJURIES THAT CAN BE REPAIRED FROM THE OUTSIDE--INSERTION OF FRESH WOOD
+IN FRACTURE OF THE RIBS--THE EFFECTS OF CLIMATE ON THE GLUE IN VIOLINS.
+
+
+We may now take this portion of the work as finished and turn to the
+consideration of repairs of fractures or filling up of parts last. It
+is early yet to think of opening the instrument for the purpose of
+rectification of anything that appears to have gone wrong either with
+the general structure or with small details. A golden rule to be
+observed by all repairers is that of never opening an instrument--that
+is removing the upper or lower table--until all other means of
+correction have proved futile. Extensive repairs to the interior may
+be accomplished without opening after a very careful look over with
+proper calculation. There are several reasons for keeping the above
+rule well in mind, among them, that if the violin is old and has
+undergone much affliction while under the hands of many doctors, some
+of these possibly belonging to the "heroic school," it may be found
+that the last visitant of the interior had straightened, bent, or
+contracted and held some of the parts together while the glue was in
+process of drying and that sufficient time had not elapsed since the
+occurrence for the strained parts to settle down under their new
+condition. An opening of the violin, removal of upper or lower table
+or any large portion, must be undertaken after due consideration and
+every precaution has been taken that nothing shall be disturbed if the
+reparation can be accomplished without. An opening of the instrument
+for the purpose of one repair may lead to the necessity of half a dozen
+before closing up again. Our opening ceremony will therefore be
+postponed until a future occasion, and we will confine ourselves to
+the consideration of such external injuries of ancient or recent origin
+that may be with the least inconvenience restored to ordinary health
+or even strength. The numbers of such and their varieties are more than
+can be related, the curious manner of their occurrence, too, would be
+an addition that would indefinitely prolong the story.
+
+Taking, therefore, small injuries or fractures that can be repaired
+from the outside, among the first coming to mind and not infrequently
+seen, is at the corners, a small piece of the projecting part of the
+rib--one of the upper or lower sets; this may have caught against
+something and got lifted away from the block, it may be on one side
+or the other, in size perhaps little more than an eighth of an inch,
+but all the same requiring immediate attention, or dirt will get in
+and make an adjourned repair more difficult if not wholly impossible
+to obscure.
+
+According to the condition, age and date of the injury, so the treatment
+must be. If the injury is quite recent and the fractures are quite clean,
+some good thick glue placed on the exposed surface and the lifted piece
+placed back in position may remain there with no further attention than
+the wiping off when dry of any superfluous glue that may have exuded
+when pressing the part on. This has been a simple matter, but if the
+part knocked away is lost, a different course must be pursued. As it
+would be impossible to find a piece of fresh wood to fit a ragged or
+irregular-shaped hollow, there is but one method to proceed upon, that
+of clearing a regular space with a sharp pointed knife. The walls of
+the space or opening should be as clean in line as possible, also quite
+vertical. A small keen-edged chisel may be found advantageous, as, by
+its aid, using it with the angular or sharpened side downwards, the
+floor of the excavation can be reduced to a fair level. This
+hollowing-out should not be too deep, leaving as much as possible of
+the bare wood uncut, only enough being removed for a good holding
+surface. If this is done neatly, the opening will be like that of a
+box into which will be fitted the fresh wood. As to this last it should
+be selected to match both with regard to texture and age whenever
+possible, also in continuation of the run of the grain, so that when
+fitted it should look as much like the surrounding wood as possible,
+that is, when free of varnish. In cutting the wood to the required size
+it should not, as in the instance of the aperture, be made with
+perfectly upright sides, but the parts that are to go into the aperture
+should be a fraction less than the outer, so as to allow of its being
+pressed in and fitting very closely all round. As the parts under
+consideration lie in the curved parts on the structure, to fit a piece
+in with success, it should also be bent with a requisite curve; if this
+is not attended to, and the clear varnish comes over it when being
+finished off, there will be a glistening of the grain underneath when
+shifted about in the light. To avoid this, which is apt to draw
+attention to the repaired parts, a larger piece of veneer than
+necessary should be first bent into the proper curve and the part nearly
+small enough cut from it and then made to fit. The bending of the piece
+can be effected by steeping it in some hot water, pressing it into form;
+being but a small portion, it will probably retain its inclination;
+if large enough and obstinate it must be kept bent by some means until
+dry, when it will show no disposition to revert back to its old form.
+If these particulars are all attended to with care, the piece of wood
+or veneer will only require a little pressure--the opening being gone
+over with strong glue--to retain its form in proper position. In case
+of failure under these conditions and the parts not holding together
+as they should, another course must be adopted.
+
+It will be most likely that some grease is the cause of the
+non-adherence of the parts. The remedy will be that of using a little
+benzine on a brush and wiping or mopping out with a small piece of linen
+on the end of a pointed stick of soft wood, after which, when quite
+dry, some fresh glue must be applied, and the parts pressed together
+and held in position.
+
+Ingenuity and the perception of the adaptation of means to an end will
+constantly be called into exercise, and at a part of the instrument
+such as is at present under consideration, will be often severely taxed.
+Want of purchase or no direct pressure being possible, or at least
+perceptible, will be the complaint of the operator, but this can always
+be overcome with a little patience.
+
+Now supposing that a piece has come off at the upper part of the waist
+curve, and if narrow or the curve is sudden it will at first sight be
+a little puzzling as to keeping pressure on the fresh part, even if
+cut sharply and ready to be deftly inserted. The difficulties will be
+considerably lessened, if not disposed of, if we take up a portion of
+soft pine or poplar, cut it in a moment or two to shape, so as to very
+loosely fit the upper curve or part we are about to glue, and not quite
+reaching the lower or usually larger curve of the waist; a small piece
+of cork placed between the wood to be inserted and that which is to
+press it while in position and another piece of cork of a wedge form
+can be squeezed in at the other end, so as to prevent the varnish being
+injured and to tighten the pressure, which will not be necessarily
+great if the fitting is good.
+
+Another kind of repair not unfrequently necessary, and which should
+not be delayed, is caused by the parting of the two ribs at the angle,
+in consequence often of accidental knocks and over weak glue. This is
+a more difficult part at which to get direct pressure than almost any
+part of the instrument. Many repairers would lift up the loose part
+or parts, both being occasionally loose, brush a little glue in,
+squeeze the parts together and leave them. When dry the ends will under
+this treatment seldom be found to meet properly as in their original
+condition. The best mode of repairing will be found that of proceeding
+by degrees, overcoming the enemy in detail. Thus firstly, we must
+observe whether the junction or construction of this part has been
+effected in the old Brescian manner--that is, the two equal parts being
+brought together, or according to the later method, the end of the
+middle rib being placed in position first, trimmed to a feather edge
+and the upper left thick and slightly overlapping it and afterwards
+trimmed into shape. In both instances the under surfaces must be
+cleaned and all the hard old glue softened and cleared out, if
+unfractured the surfaces of both corner block and rib fitting will be
+as originally left by the maker. In either style of construction it
+will be best to proceed first with the middle rib and support or prop
+it against the block in the way before mentioned. When quite dry we
+can remove the pressure and get to work at the other. After being quite
+sure that no hard glue or foreign particles remain between the surfaces
+to prevent a perfect fit as in the original condition, a small mould
+cut from soft wood again and of a size and shape that will fit loosely
+the semi-circular part must be cut, and some soft paper got ready to
+go between as a protection for the varnished part. If the parts are
+not much worn away, or the front and back plates are in fair condition,
+the rib may be glued and the screw cramp, cork or paper of course being
+used as a protector, and the rib will be held in position. If this is
+not sufficient for getting a close and accurate fit, the soft wood mould
+mentioned above must be placed, and a slight pressure gained by a wedge
+of wood gently inserted and pressed home. This mode of repair, it will
+be borne in mind, is when the upper and lower plates are in fairly good
+condition. Different treatment would be adopted if both were separated
+or the upper one taken off.
+
+Sometimes the cramping, although sufficient for getting a good mend
+where there is a good extent of surface, will not be quite the thing
+for a small part, perhaps a slight opening at the extreme edge; in this
+instance a wooden mould, cut in a few minutes from a flat board large
+enough to allow of an oval aperture being made that will admit of the
+body of the violin being passed through. This being done and a small
+wedge being here and there judiciously inserted, will enable the
+operator to get enough purchase, or advantage may be taken of the
+juxtaposition of the cramp, and using both to gain the requisite
+pressure against the bend of the rib in the manner before mentioned.
+
+There are as a matter of course extremely numerous kinds of fractures
+or injuries arising from almost as many different causes. If time and
+space permitted, they might be classified and each credited to their
+different agencies. Sufficient for our purpose, however, will be the
+separation of them into three divisions: firstly, those which may be
+the outcome or result of ordinary wear and giving way of parts through
+atmospheric influence, such as damp or excessive dryness, or both at
+times, in combination with varying temperature. People are apt to debit
+the climate of Britain with many shortcomings and the cause of much
+undoing of good work in the fiddle world and the prevention of its being
+accomplished in the concluding stages of fiddle facture.
+
+Much of the good quality attached to Italian instruments has been
+attributed to the beautiful and dry air of Italy. Now that Italy has
+beautiful air no one can deny, that is, while not standing in the
+streets of some of the most interesting cities therein, but that it
+is dry generally is perhaps going beyond the mark; remember it is a
+very mountainous place with some exceptional portions, this may be
+easily verified by a glance over a good map of the place, or better,
+a tour by railway from the northern provinces down as far as Naples.
+Knowledge is fairly general as to mountainous districts, much more than
+plains, being the localities where rain is most frequent, the more or
+less saturation of the atmosphere following as a matter of course.
+
+But let Italian fiddles speak for themselves, otherwise than through
+the medium of gut strings. The first makers of violins in Brescia used
+no side linings, but trusted to the most excellent quality of their
+glue for holding back and front to the ribs. That their trust was not
+misplaced in many instances is proved by the work in its primitive
+condition remaining intact to the present day. With the rise of the
+Cremonese school, delicacy in treatment of detail became fashionable;
+makers found that in order to give expression to their ideas in as many
+particulars as possible over the work, especially in respect of
+refinement in the curving of the ribs, less thickness of wood in these
+parts would have to be used, especially when of very decided curl; but
+this would not hold well except in the driest districts. The system
+was then introduced of using the thin slips of wood running from block
+to block; the thickness of these, although slight, added to the thin
+substance of the rib, allowed a better holding power to back and front.
+
+The fact is here evident that the glue, of exceeding good quality--and
+that it was so will be corroborated by all repairers who have had to
+do with the old Italian instruments--was too easily affected by the
+damp of the atmosphere.
+
+Further evidence frequently turns up among the great numbers of old
+Italian instruments gathered from all sorts of places, of the efforts
+at combating the effects of damp. Some of the means adopted by various
+repairers, apparently in the smaller towns--judging by the bad, even
+extraordinary woods used--have been very curious, many interesting,
+others primitive, even stupid. At about the same time the Amatis were
+introducing the use of side-linings, Giov. Maggini was trying other
+means of preventing the parting of the upper and lower tables from the
+ribs by damp. A method he adopted, and which many later makers
+imitated--if it did not occur to them spontaneously--was by cutting
+a groove all round and inserting the ribs. It will be obvious from this
+that no linings were used in these instances. That his efforts were
+not followed by success may be concluded from the fact that he did not
+persevere with the system. The simple method of his master was fallen
+back upon and thicker ribs placed in position. When we come across one
+of those grooved tables it will probably be found--as might have been
+anticipated by Maggini had he known beforehand of the course to be taken
+by his art, which was at the time almost a local one--that a repairer
+has at one time thought it necessary to lift the ribs from one or the
+other plate, and almost, of course, bungled over it. This will be seen
+in the irregularity of the fitting of the ribs, which have been
+ruthlessly cut or torn out of the groove, some portions being left in.
+Taking them out was found to be unprofitable work, with a general result
+of a wretched wreck remaining, instead of the whole original being
+there but shifted a little, from the glue losing its hold while
+perishing from the action of moisture.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+THE GLUE USED BY THE EARLY ITALIAN MAKERS--INSERTION OF PIECES OF WOOD
+FOR REPAIRING LOST PARTS--REPLACING LOST RIB AND REPAIRING INTERIOR
+WITHOUT OPENING WHEN POSSIBLE--SECURING LOOSE LOWER RIB TO END
+BLOCK--DIFFERENT METHODS--TREATMENT OF WORM-HOLES--FIXING ON GRAFT ON
+NECK.
+
+
+Here, before proceeding further, it may be as well to call attention
+to the kind of damage done by the atmosphere. We speak of the glue
+perishing. Under most circumstances this will not occur, but under
+exceptional ones it will. If good in the first instance, it will be
+perfectly sound and strong as ever at the end of three hundred years.
+I have found this to be so in the work of Gasparo da Salo and his pupil,
+Giovanni Paolo Maggini, besides other makers nearly contemporary. What
+particular kind of glue they used I am unable to say, possibly they
+did not know very much more themselves beyond what they believed was
+the best obtainable in their day and city. When the perishing has
+occurred there must have been very much moisture in the atmosphere of
+the locality in which the violin rested for some time, as the best glue
+will absorb the most moisture before losing its firmness, or power of
+adherence. Prolonged exposure to damp allows chemical change to take
+place and then all adhesive quality is lost; when dry air afterwards
+attacks it, the parts of the instrument that should have been held
+firmly together are released, with results that may be serious in
+degree according to the position of the part affected.
+
+To continue the consideration of the repair of a violin that has been
+constructed with grooves for holding the ribs. A long and troublesome
+piece of work would be the loosening and taking away of the fragments
+of rib inserted in the groove and cut away by some repairer from the
+rest or standing rib; it is therefore preferable in ordinary and neat
+repairing to clear the parts that may be ragged or begrimed, firstly,
+by washing with a stiff brush of appropriate size and wiping with a
+clean cotton rag repeatedly; when the rag ceases to be soiled or
+discoloured after wiping, the parts may be taken as fairly clean. A
+sharp knife will take off any projections that may be prominent and
+prevent the proper placing of the rib in position; if the
+irregularities give indication of fitting well, the parts may have at
+their approaching edges a touching with strong, hot glue, and the
+cramps with protection applied as before for other joinings.
+
+The probabilities, however, are, that through bad treatment, added to
+wear and tear, the parts will not fit under any circumstances, then
+the only course will be to make an even surface at the part broken away,
+and then fit a piece of fresh wood therein. If the aperture made is
+not of large extent and not wide, or more than the thickness of an
+average piece of veneer is required, then the fresh wood need not be
+bent, but cut neatly for fitting, and after glueing, as usual, slipped
+in with a part projecting beyond the surrounding surface. When quite
+dry it may be pared down carefully with a sharp knife, or if not
+manageable on the curve of the rib, a chisel of size according to the
+amount of room; being a narrow slip, after the colouring down and
+varnishing has taken place, it will be but slightly noticeable. The
+same treatment can, of course, be adopted for either upper or lower
+part of the rib; the middle rib position will give the most trouble,
+owing to its concavity, but care and patience will overcome the
+difficulties of the situation. Should there have happened an accident
+by which a hole of some extent is rent in the ribs--either upper, lower,
+or middle--it is not absolutely necessary that the instrument be opened
+to accomplish the repair; bear in mind the advice given before, not
+to open a violin which has been in good going order if the repair can
+be effected without.
+
+As we are presumably working on disabled violins that are valuable,
+perhaps old friends, or interesting specimens of a particular school,
+to select the best mode of restoration is our aim. For this purpose
+we will call to our aid some low class violin, new or old, that is of
+no value except for our purpose. If several are within reach we can
+select one with wood that matches as near as possible the one under
+process of restoration. Being already bent to shape, a portion may be
+found somewhere about it, that with a little exercise of judgment can
+be cut out to shape, and as in manner pointed out before, be placed
+over the aperture of the fracture. Care must be taken that it quite
+covers the part, while being likely to fit sufficiently well as regards
+figure or curl and direction of grain. The sides cleanly cut should
+not be quite vertical with the general plane, the inner surface being
+a shade smaller than the outer, thus enabling the operator, with a
+little pressure, to insert it, when glued, quite neatly. No
+instructions or suggestions with regard to fitting will counterbalance
+clumsiness of handling. In operations of this kind, delicacy of
+handling equal to anything required in watch repairing will be
+obligatory, that is if restoration of a high class is intended.
+
+It would be impossible to deal with, touch upon, or even to recount
+every possible injury to a violin that might be repaired without the
+removal of the upper table, but there are still some remaining that
+will be worth considering, if only for the purpose of restraining the
+tendency to open the instrument upon too trivial a pretext. One
+instance occurs to memory at the present moment, in which a violin,
+the constant companion and closest friend of its owner, met with an
+accident that seemed to him well-nigh total destruction, at any rate,
+necessitating much renewal with undoing and plastering up of fractures.
+To the fiddle physician it was promptly taken, carefully scanned, and
+the owner told that it would be all right in a few days. Will it have
+to be taken all to pieces? asked the anxious owner. Not if it can be
+possibly helped, was the reply. The violin was called for in due time,
+and in answer to inquiries it was fetched and seen to be in as good
+going order as before the time of the accident. There was no apparent
+evidence of damage, no sign of fracture or any neatly-laid patches,
+there were the ribs as sound as when new, no cracks to be seen. How
+did you manage that? said the owner, and you say there was no necessity
+to take the front off? Easier far, replied the repairer, the more there
+is left undisturbed the more assistance will these parts give you
+during the progress of restoration, and as you seem curious and
+desirous of solving the mystery of this renovation I will relate how
+it was accomplished. You are no doubt fully aware that your violin is
+of a size and shape well-known in the trade as a "Strad pattern;" well,
+there are thousands of violins in any number of degrees of quality
+similar in form and size, in fact, for us modern makers there are too
+many about. Catching the peculiarities of pattern with my eye at a
+glance, the difficulties to be overcome were not very numerous or great.
+I saw there was no reunion of parts of the ribs to be thought of, as
+they had gone, and your violin being a modern copy of ordinary
+pretensions, it would not serve our purpose to join four-fifths of new
+rib to the remainder, and so to make a clean and satisfactory renovation
+a fresh rib would best answer. Taking down from a shelf a number of
+loose parts of violins put aside for such occasions as the present,
+I soon found a middle rib that matched in most particulars those of
+your violin. It had the additional advantage of being better for the
+keeping, as regards colour or looking less new.
+
+The first proceeding was to clear out all the useless fragments of the
+spoiled rib, search every corner and see that there were no splinters
+left, and remove projecting particles of glue. All edges that were to
+come in contact with the fresh rib were washed, and where permissible,
+the surfaces made even by a slight levelling, finely shaving them with
+a sharp tool. The fresh rib was then tried, and being of full size and
+requiring more than the least pressure to get it placed, some little
+shaving down here and there was found necessary, and when done it was
+tried again carefully and repeated perhaps three or four times, when
+all parts seemed to fit sufficiently well. Each time the rib was
+inserted there was, of course, nothing projecting whereby it might be
+withdrawn; to accomplish this, a bent wire of sufficient strength
+passed through the most distant of the two sound holes gave it a push
+out again. When the piece was found to fit with accuracy, little
+remained to do beyond glueing the edges that were to come together,
+and after seeing that every part was in right position, the screw cramps
+were applied with sufficient force and no more, the superfluous glue
+wiped away and the whole left to itself. When sufficient time had been
+allowed for drying, the cramps were removed, a little cleaning of parts
+effected and the fresh work varnished in a manner so as to match nearly
+as possible with the rest of the instrument, and there you have your
+violin with a fresh rib inserted without removing anything but the
+damaged part. It was really, as you may have perceived, the easiest
+way of working the thing, there being no secondary process to be gone
+through, nothing but cramping down, varnishing and finishing off.
+
+Another instance comes to my mind of what can be done in the way of
+alteration of the interior without removing the upper table. It came
+within my own experience many years back, and the violin was one owned
+by myself at the time. It had got into a condition not unfrequently
+seen after bad repairing, that of the fingerboard sinking down too near
+the table through absence of proper support or sufficient grip of the
+end of the table where the neck is inserted. Being unable to attend
+to the matter myself at the time, I sought the aid of a friend living
+close by, a clever amateur violin maker and mechanical constructor of
+other things beside. He was not very long setting matters right, and
+my violin seemed in no danger of further getting into disorder from
+the same cause. I asked him how he had managed the rectification of
+the matter; did he take the upper table off? "Oh no, without that. I
+simply opened or loosened the left side of the table about and above
+the upper corner, then, having cut and glued a slight thin wedge-shaped
+piece of wood, through the narrow opening caused by the loosening of
+the table, I passed it on a thin knife long enough to reach to the upper
+block, between which and the part of the upper table which was not
+holding I carefully thrust it and tucked it in, finally glueing and
+cramping again the part of the table that I had purposely loosened."
+
+This was a clever operation, successful but very risky, and not to be
+lightly undertaken by anyone without much experience and even natural
+ability for mechanical adaptation of means to an end. There was much
+danger, from the narrowness of the approach to the work from the side
+opening, of missing the mark and dropping the piece of wood with great
+difficulty of recovery, and, further, the chance of cracking the upper
+table by straining the opening for the admission of knife and wedge
+of wood. I heard of the violin but a few days since, and have no reason
+to suppose there has been occasion to have any further repairs done.
+
+Among other mishaps occurring at times, and which from their position
+seem difficult to remedy, is that of the lower rib becoming detached,
+or losing its hold on the block; this is more liable to take place when
+there is a join running up and past the tail pin hole. Both sides may
+be loose or one only. When, as in a great many of the old Italian violins,
+the rib is continuous, it very seldom gets detached. Here the advantage
+of simplicity of construction is made evident. The rib being of one
+piece running round the lower end right past the tail pin was not, as
+too often supposed, done for a saving of time by one operation, but
+for strength and neatness. When in two parts, sometimes with a piece
+of purfling inserted--each side is subject to damage either by the
+tampering with the tail pin, the nut above, or during repeated removals
+of the upper table. Exposure to damp will, as a matter of course, affect
+the original glueing of these parts as soon as any other. The detachment
+from the block may remain unnoticed for some length of time, until
+getting worse by degrees one part may be seen to be lifted or warped
+away from the join. If without this appearance suspicion is aroused
+in some way as to looseness, it can be verified or not with little
+trouble by tapping with a felt-headed piano-hammer, when the sound,
+which should be quite solid, will, on the contrary, be rattling.
+
+Seemingly the repair of this part is an awkward matter from the absence
+of any purchase for pressing the parts and retaining them in position
+when freshly glued. The difficulty is more apparent than real, as there
+are several ways of overcoming this obstacle. To begin with one. The
+tail pin will, of course, be removed; if fitting rather tightly and
+of good length, use may be made of it.
+
+As usual all the parts to be glued must be cleansed by a brush and clean
+water, sopping up the moisture after each application, pressing
+repeatedly the loose parts until they seem to be clean enough. A piece
+of soft pine or poplar will now be cut that will be just wide enough
+to go easily over the parts lying over the block and which of course
+cover all the loose parts that require fixing: it may be a trifle under
+a quarter of an inch in thickness. One side must be shaped to fit the
+parts over the block when pressed against them and should be a sort
+of mould. A hole will now be pierced to admit the cylindrical part of
+the tail pin, or if not long enough, a made substitute with a similar
+rim. It should be tried by passing it through to the tail pin hole,
+and if it fits tight enough to sustain itself against some pulling we
+can proceed. The fit should be close enough so that when the peg is
+passed through the hole in the mould and the latter pressed by this
+means against the rib or the two parts on to the block, all should be
+held firmly in position. Taking them apart again, strong glue should
+be applied by a brush to the surfaces that will meet or be worked in
+as when the cleansing was going on. The peg and the mould--with a piece
+of paper on its face to prevent adhesion--may then be pressed in to
+hold tight until hard and dry. The same method may be pursued with the
+exception that in place of the peg a screw--if one is to hand large
+enough--may be inserted. In this case it should be a very loose fit
+to the hole, the grip will be obtained by rolling up a piece of paper
+and inserting it in the tail pin hole, the screw can then be used against
+this inside without damaging the block.
+
+Another way of accomplishing the desired result will be by a stout
+leather strap and buckle passed round over all the ribs of the
+instrument; the same sort of mould will be used and applied in the same
+manner. The strap will need holding in position at the upper or neck
+end over the button, a string over the fingerboard will be sufficient;
+at the other end over the mould a wedge of soft wood according to size
+will enable the pressure towards the block to be regulated. Another
+contrivance with the same mould, for this must always be used, is by
+getting a wire with a turned or screwed end fitted with a head or nut,
+the other end can be bent to right angles, but not too much length used
+or it will not go through the tail pin hole. When in position, having
+been passed through the hole in the mould, the right angled or bent
+end will catch against the inner surface of the block, the head or nut
+being then screwed round will tighten and press the mould towards the
+block with enough grip for the purpose if all the rest is in proper
+order.
+
+Should these contrivances not be to hand or are found inconvenient,
+yet another method is that of using the screw-cramp. A portion of
+mill-board or cork being placed to protect the parts of the upper and
+lower table between which the end block is situated, the screw can be
+turned tight enough to allow of a wedge of wood being inserted between
+the back of the cramp and the mould without risk of shifting; it can
+then be left until dry and hard.
+
+Occasionally there will be not only the detachment from the block, but
+there will be the accompaniment of a split in the rib. There will be
+in this instance a preliminary cleansing of the split and joining
+together before proceeding with the other part. The reason for doing
+this is that the pressure on towards the block is apt to widen instead
+of closing the crack. The most usual way of mending a crack, or there
+may be more than one, is by the use of a small hand vice. A piece of
+stout card placed between the teeth of the vice to prevent an imprint,
+the part to be joined will, after cleaning and glueing, be brought
+closely as possible together and the vice screwed up. For this process
+the help of another person will be almost absolutely necessary, as two
+hands will be required for holding the parts together while the second
+person holds the vice and turns the screw to order. When dry and
+unscrewed the parts joined will require a little scraping of the
+superfluous glue, washing away at a thin part as this is would be
+dangerous; if brought together neatly the rib can then be pressed on
+the block in the manner before explained.
+
+The same process will be gone through when a portion of fresh rib has
+to be inserted at this part, owing to loss of a piece through violence
+or the ravages of the worm. In the latter case searching inquiry should
+be made with a pointed wire or pin and the direction of the boring
+operations ascertained, as it may be necessary to insert a larger piece
+than was originally intended to avoid a large smash or general collapse
+at the part where the greatest strength should be. There is often too
+great a tendency shown in repairing, especially in preparation for the
+market, as, for instance, when an old master has been unearthed in some
+farmhouse or out of the way place on the Continent, to make a clean
+sweep of a somewhat riddled part, the repairer trusting too much to
+his imitative powers on new wood with new varnish, and we may say with
+new ideas on old facts; it is seldom that the result is far from hideous.
+Better trace the tortuous course of a whole family of worms and fill
+up with a cement or plugging than, as is too often the case, cut a huge
+slice away, for if so the instrument according to the extent begins
+to assume a composite character, it may be ten out of twelve parts gem
+of an old master and two parts modern trash, hateful to the eye of the
+connoisseur.
+
+While touching upon the subject of worm-holes, a few words more may
+not be out of place when contemplating the ravages of these voracious
+creatures. Almost all devotees to the "gentle art" of fiddling have
+a great horror of the possible presence or the ungauged depths of the
+mysterious tunnellings the entrance or exit to which will cause a start
+of dismay in a searcher after the beautiful, when, in an otherwise
+perfectly preserved specimen of art by one of the giants of old, his
+eye alights upon that sharply defined circular hole, cut with no
+uncertainty of purpose, but with a ruinous intent, for it is business
+with the boring party to consume the whole, if possible, at its leisure
+and in quietude. This last is an important item in the consideration
+of the circumstances under which the "gem of art, old master, Cremona,
+real Strad," or whatever title the wooden structure may have been
+sailing under. Those who have suffered much from the Italian
+fiddle-hunting mania--a condition mostly chronic or quite
+incurable--but who may have kept their "considerating cap" well poised
+on their head, will know that the worm-eaten fiddles are often devoid
+of evidence of usage, sometimes even in the absolute sense of the term.
+
+Such a one we may suppose before us now; after lying neglected for
+generations, or since the time when it was bought by one of our
+periwigged ancestors from the maker, perhaps after a little haggling
+about the price, which most likely was one hundredth part of its
+commercial value at present. It was placed many years since in its
+present comfortable case, after being taken out of the old ragged
+leather covered one, with the brass nails along its side. Tradition
+has it that in long bye-gone days it used to hang suspended from a nail
+in the oak panelling of the "old house at home," but that during a more
+recent generation and less musical one, it was placed aside in the old
+case, as being somewhat interesting from having been brought over to
+England from some place in Italy during the reign of James II. Later
+on it was taken from this old case, and placed in one of modern
+construction, and occasionally was taken out for musical people to see,
+some of whom expressed their admiration for its elegant form, others
+for the singular transparency of its varnish. None had come forward
+with the request to hear what it had to say for itself or what its tone
+was. But the day came round at last when someone more inquisitive than
+usual, by nature as well as by training, having inquired as to the
+possibility of seeing the antiquity, was afforded the rare opportunity
+and treat of seeing a perfectly preserved Cremona, nearly as possible
+untouched; the connoisseur was informed that no one had been known to
+have played upon it. The case is brought forward and opened, the violin,
+with perhaps one very brown string dangling from it, is taken gently
+up, the left hand encircling the neck, while the forefingers and thumb
+of the right, hold the lower part near the tail-piece.
+
+The violin is turned first one way, then the other, and sideways for
+viewing the ribs and the beautiful play of light through the varnish,
+the fine curl of the maple with the slightest movement, almost giving
+an impression of hastily shifting from one row to another, in fact,
+looking as if the wood were gifted with life. Steadily turning it about,
+the connoisseur at last breaks out with the exclamation, this is the
+most wonderful thing I have met with in my life, it is almost perfect,
+practically new, looks, perhaps, but a dozen years old. What a
+beautiful design, what colour, and splendid wood, both the pine and
+maple, the workmanship, too, having that wonderful freedom of handling
+which moderns find so impassable a barrier to success with their
+"imitations of the antique!" Lost in admiration for some minutes, the
+connoisseur's critical faculties after a while begin to assert
+themselves, and he is on the look out for flaws or defects that may
+mar the completeness of the whole; it might be a little more this or
+that with advantage, not quite so fine in one respect, although perhaps
+better in another than the one owned by his friend Smith; but oh! a
+wormhole! that settles it, done for! perhaps the thing is riddled, or
+even "honeycombed" in parts. The delight at finding a work of art in
+apparently so perfect condition is succeeded by a more than
+counterbalancing sense of frustrated hopes, schemes for acquisition
+of the gem being dissipated at once by that small circular opening just
+at the under part of the edging there near the corner. Our friend takes
+his departure, but cannot help talking of the "find" to the dealer and
+repairer of whom he purchases his strings. This person takes another
+view of the affair, and resolves to see the thing and perhaps acquire
+possession, so that like his customer, he gets permission to inspect
+the violin. It is brought out as in the other instance and he turns
+it about, gives it a sly pinch here and there, looks for any light
+coloured dust or powder inside and does not see any, a shake or two
+with the same result. The subject of parting with the instrument at
+a fair price is at length broached to the owner, who would like to know
+what Mr. ---- would be prepared to give for it, but this party means
+business and not valuation gratis for the owner; he therefore dilates
+upon the difficulties attending the keeping of a large stock of such
+articles, besides the thing having been bored so much by worms can never
+take its place again among prominent examples of the maker, and it would
+want a lot of playing upon even if possibly well restored. Mr. ----
+finally departs as owner of a finely preserved Cremona violin, not
+exactly for a "mere song," but a few judiciously selected sentences
+and fewer pounds. Out of the house his steps are lighter and swifter
+as he gets nearer his premises. When arrived he takes it to the
+repairing room; removing it from the case he again examines it, and
+with a smile says to his chief repairing help--here, what d'ye think
+of that? This workman, who has not studied as an enthusiastic
+connoisseur during the many years of his working on the premises, takes
+it up, looks it well over, and then observes--"well, at first I thought
+it was a good modern copy, but now if I don't think it's a real one!
+Well, I never! it is, too! look at that stuff all over it." This was
+his manner of criticising varnish when it seemed to him of good quality.
+"I would like to have some of that! a worm-hole though. Don't know how
+far that goes." "We'll soon see," says the other. After a few turns
+over again amidst remarks of admiration expressed in different ways,
+the fiddle is brought into a good light and preparations made for
+opening it. "Why, I don't think it's ever been opened before," says
+one. "Certainly not," says the other. "Now," says the dealer, "you had
+better do it," and the workman proceeds thus--first removing the
+tailpiece and with a "post setter" lifting the sound post out carefully
+through the right sound hole, he removes the tail pin, and holding the
+instrument to let as much light as possible into the interior, looks
+through the pin hole and observes--"No patch in this, Mr. ----, fresh
+as a new-laid egg--original bar too,--however, let's go ahead." The
+fiddle is then laid face downwards on a cushion or soft pad and held
+in position with the extended palm of the hand. The operator then takes
+what has been once in use as a table knife, but is now thin and smooth
+with wear, keeping the left hand firmly in position and the knife in
+the other, he casts his eye round for any portion that may seem looser
+or more lightly glued than the rest. It has been very neatly done
+however, and one part seems as good as another. "Stop a moment," says
+his companion, "let's have another look inside, maybe we shall see how
+the worms have been going about by the light passing through."
+
+It is taken again to a window; the sun fortunately is streaming in and
+so enables master and man to proceed under favourable conditions. The
+dealer patiently turns the violin about so that the rays of the sun
+may penetrate wherever possible through the material; after a while
+he hands the violin to his workman--"you have a look, James, I cannot
+see any traces--I don't think the worm has gone very far, seemingly
+only a short distance from the opening." James looking again, and
+coming to the same conclusion, the violin is again taken to the
+operating table and the knife taken in hand.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+WAYS OF REMOVING THE UPPER TABLE AND THE NECK--CLEANSING THE
+INTERIOR--PRESERVATION OF THE ORIGINAL LABEL--CLOSING OF CRACKS IN
+UPPER TABLE.
+
+
+I recollect many years back, when in company with a violinist of some
+note, we were talking over various details in connection with the
+reparation and regulation of violins of a high class, particularly
+those of the great masters. The fact of so many fine instruments having
+fractures of the same kind and in the same position was remarked as
+being curious, why so numerous as to form a very large majority? Well,
+said the professor, at one time cracks were really fashionable, and
+an instrument well endowed with them was thought to emit its tone more
+freely, especially if it had been somewhat stiff before. This might
+account for some, but not so many coming from all parts, I observed,
+from their similarity I am inclined to their being due to one principal
+cause, that of carelessness on the part of repairers in former times
+and some even of the present. It is through hurry or want of method
+in removing the upper table, should it be necessary. A repairer once
+confessed to me that he had sometimes caused these fractures in his
+impetuousness while going through this preliminary; his excuse was one
+frequently made for all sorts of bad work, clumsiness and want of
+judgment, that people would not pay for proper time and care being
+expended, and so when he cracked the front while taking it off, he glued
+it up again.
+
+As generally is the case, more than one method can be pursued for
+removal of the upper table. A somewhat original one was recommended
+to me once as being very successful and causing the table to part from
+the rest beautifully without risk of fracture, and that was, firstly
+to obtain some vessel holding boiling water and with a suitable pipe
+attached for throwing a fine jet of steam against the glued parts
+requiring separation. Not having seen this done, or tried it myself,
+I am unable to speak for or against this process, but there appears
+to be some risk of damaging the varnish in the vicinity while the steam
+is forced against the small space for operating upon. I was assured
+that this was an excellent mode of separation, there being no tearing
+about or splintering of the wood. It might be a good method where there
+is perceptibly much impasto of glue, and which, while almost readily
+yielding to the penetrative power of steam, is a great nuisance under
+ordinary circumstances. Another method would be that of getting some
+lengths of soft cotton rag or other substance that would retain
+moisture well when wetted; these could be laid all round, tucked
+closely against the junction of the upper table and ribs and left for
+a reasonable time or kept wetted in dry weather. This, if not quite
+causing a disjunction, would facilitate the operation of the knife in
+the usual way. I think, however, that any departure from the rule of
+using the knife is very rare indeed, any other means necessarily taking
+time and taxing the patience.
+
+We will now return to the dealer and his assistant or repairer. The
+matter in hand with them is business, and therefore a regular routine
+is gone through when the instrument is worthy of first class repair,
+and everything conducive to the best results in up-to-date regulation
+has to be calculated and carried out in minute detail. Searching eyes
+will go over all the fresh parts, looking for any possible inaccuracy,
+any slip of the tool or ruggedness where a fine, even surface ought
+to be. In order that all may be conveniently attended to, the first
+proceeding will be that of sawing off the head and neck, this is done
+rather close to the body of the instrument. Under present circumstances,
+more care than usual with modern violins has to be exercised, as the
+repairer knows that it was customary with the old Italian makers to
+secure the neck to the upper block by one, two, or at times even three
+nails. They were driven in from the interior before the final closing
+up or fixing of the upper table. Sometimes a screw is found in the same
+place instead of nails. These arrangements point to a want of
+confidence in glue by these old masters, notwithstanding the evidence
+we have of their using the finest quality only. In separating the neck
+from the body, it will obviously be wise to act in a very cautious manner,
+or the saw may come suddenly upon the nails or screw, and there will
+be a grating of teeth, and perhaps upsetting of the temper of the
+performer. It will therefore be a consideration for the repairer
+whether the instrument has been previously opened, or is in that very
+rare condition, as the maker left it. Economy of time and labour always
+more or less being a desideratum, in the supposed instance before us,
+that of an untouched old master, our repairer having had experience
+with many Italian violins of different degrees of merit, first proceeds
+by removing the old fingerboard. This being short and less massive than
+the modern kind, presents but little difficulty. The cushion filled
+with sawdust or sand, is now called into requisition. Placing the
+violin on its back and tilting it up so that the button and the back
+of the scroll press equally on the yielding surface, it is held in
+position with some degree of firmness, the fingers of the right hand
+being placed underneath the wide end of the fingerboard, a sudden pull
+upward causes the fingerboard in most instances to part with a snap.
+Should it refuse to do so, other means must be resorted to. The
+fingerboard may be one of the old inlaid kind, or veneered pine, and
+worth keeping as a curiosity, in which case the saw must be applied
+to any part of the neck for removing wood that will not be required
+again, piece-meal, until the board is free, when it can be further
+cleared at leisure.
+
+Our repairer, not finding in the fingerboard under his hands any
+particular merit, it being besides worn into ruts near the nut by
+performers of the early schools, who used but little more than the first
+position, moreover, coming away with ease, proceeds to the sawing
+process. The presence of nails or screw he believes to be fairly certain,
+therefore instead of sawing down close and even as possible with the
+ribs, the saw line is made at an angle downward and outward toward the
+head, or say at an angle of some forty-five degrees, beginning at about
+a quarter of an inch away from the borders of the upper table. The cut
+thus made would be free from any nail or screw, unless of extraordinary
+dimensions. (Diag. 35.)
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 35.]
+
+In the case of a modern violin, the saw cut could be made close to the
+border and downward to within a short distance of the button, where
+another cut at right angles and parallel to the surface of it will free
+the neck completely. The violin, now as before, is placed front
+downwards on the cushion or pad, some repairers would hold it on their
+knees, but only in the absence of either means. In the present instance,
+being a prize and sure to eventually pay for any amount of trouble and
+skill expended, the violin is treated in a manner that long experience
+and judgment dictate as safest. Opening the instrument has been agreed
+to as being absolutely necessary, the old short bar would certainly
+prove inadequate to withstand the pressure from above if the violin
+and its fittings were to be subjected to modern regulation under
+present conditions. Everything being ready, the operator with steady
+hands inserts the knife with a sudden push at the under part of the
+edging--from the position of the violin the knife would now be above
+it--at the lower quarter of the instrument, this having the largest
+curve and therefore being weakest in resistance to the plunge of the
+knife. As the thin bladed knife is worked along, there is a tendency
+to stick occasionally. This is counteracted by running along, or
+slightly wiping the surface of the knife, a cotton rag, with the
+smallest touch of oil upon it; this will enable the knife to go quite
+smoothly. Great care is exercised that the knife is held on an exact
+level with the plane of the pine table, or there will be great risk
+of running the knife into the pine instead of lifting it away from the
+joint. Evidence of bad judgment in this respect is not infrequently
+to be met with on otherwise well repaired instruments. A series of sharp
+cracking sounds come forth as the knife works its way in. It is worked
+along in either direction until near the corner block or near the nut.
+At this part, the violin being in the original state as fresh from the
+hand of its maker at Cremona, the treatment will be slightly different
+to what it would be after modern regulation.
+
+The knife will come to a full stop here, and be taken out for proceeding
+with the release of the table on the opposite side. It will be as a
+matter of course, necessary to place the violin the other end foremost,
+the larger end being furthest from the operator; the knife, as before,
+being inserted at the large curve in the same manner and for the same
+reason, finally stopping as before at each end. The principal reason
+for stopping at the end is that with most of the old Italian violins
+there is a short wooden pin, probably used for temporarily securing
+the table in position before the final glueing down. These wooden pins
+of hard or tough consistency being driven in firmly, offer considerable
+resistance to the passage of the knife if the latter is forced through.
+Most of the violins having these pins originally, give evidence of the
+exertions of the repairer to press the knife through these obstacles
+at the risk, ofttimes with certainty, of breaking up or smashing the
+fibres of the surrounding portion of the pine. Of a dozen old Italians,
+perhaps on an average ten will be found with this part broken, jagged,
+or having a portion of fresh wood inserted where ruffianly treatment
+has bruised the threads of the pine past remedy. Our professional
+repairers, being men of experience, further, both having a natural
+disposition and qualification for their calling, know better than to
+use much violence in this part of their work, so taking the knife away,
+the operator cleanses it from all glue or resinous particles, and when
+perfectly dry, passes the slightly oiled rag again over both surfaces.
+The knife being inserted again and again, is pressed round about the
+pin and thrust forward so that the increasing thickness of the blade
+may act as a long wedge, this gradually lifts the table away, leaving
+the pin standing.
+
+The lower end will require the same treatment for easing the upper table
+round the pin. In original condition most of the old Italian violins
+would not give further trouble, but some later or middle period ones,
+instead of the small piece of ebony or other hard substance slightly
+inserted or laid half way through the table, have an ebony nut going
+quite through and down in a triangular form nearly to the tailpin. In
+these instances a small knife held vertically and pressed along between
+the parts of the ebony touching the pine will enable the table to come
+away gradually in the manner indicated. We now may suppose ourselves
+again in the presence of the repairers, operator and master; the upper
+table has been successfully and cleanly released from the blocks and
+along the upper edging of the ribs, very few splinters here and there
+are left, giving double evidence of neat glueing on the part of the
+maker and systematic care on that of the modern repairer.
+
+Being now quite free and gently lifted off, the table is turned about
+for a moment and attention is directed to the interior. The two men
+look at all the parts with very different eyes. One with eager
+expectancy, critical eye and much experience, sees at a glance much
+that intensely interests him, confirms certain views of the old methods
+of working, whether the wood was white and new when the violin was
+constructed, how a little of the precious material enveloping the whole
+structure had dropped through the sound holes during the process of
+varnishing; watches the form of the drops whether they indicate a thin
+or a thick solution of the resinous particles, whether these have
+cracked or blistered in the Milanese or Venetian manner, whether they
+show signs of having set at once or remained soft and running for a
+time; the corner and end blocks, their material, and whether the same
+as those linings let into the middle ones and their being finished off
+before or after the placing in position. The joint of the back too,
+and if there remained any evidence of system in working different to
+what we moderns would do? These and other queries passed rapidly
+through the mind of the dealer and connoisseur, more of the latter than
+the former, and that is why he was not more successful by many degrees
+than any others of the fraternity. To be a dealer in the strictly
+business sense of the term, a number of valuable violins must to him
+be no more than potatoes in a basket to a greengrocer, _i.e._, what
+they appear worth.
+
+His assistant--a good accurate mechanic in almost all respects, sees
+in this unearthed "old master," "gem of antiquity," or _chef d'oeuvre_
+of Italian art, nothing but the interior of a dirty brown box with a
+rolling ball of fluff resting in one of the corners.
+
+There are perhaps few things more disappointing than the interior of
+a violin when opened for the purpose of repairing. Be it a matchless
+gem of Cremona's art or an old and common Tyrolese worth but a few
+shillings, the difference to an ordinary observer is so slight as to
+be uninteresting, indeed to connoisseurs of experience there is not
+the variation sufficient to excite curiosity to the extent of opening
+the instrument on that ground solely. The raw and unvarnished wood,
+with the parts between the threads swollen from damp, begrimed and
+repeatedly washed by repairers, presents anything but a pleasing
+spectacle even when the interior of a fine "Strad" or Joseph is laid
+bare. Many years ago a friend owning a fine Cremonese viola asked me
+to open it and find out the cause of some buzzing or rattling within
+that had not been evident till that time. After an examination, finding
+that opening it would be absolutely necessary, I asked him whether he
+would like to see the interior of what he had paid so much for; it might
+not prove an enjoyable sight from the roughness and dirt of ages in
+combination with clumsily executed repairs while in unskilful hands;
+being unaccustomed to such sights he wisely restrained his curiosity
+and waited till all was placed right again.
+
+But to our dealer and workman again; the former, taking up the two
+portions alternately, at last makes the remark, "Clean work, James,
+inside as well as out, good tool work, they had some steel in those
+days, plenty of glass-papering here apparently, unlike some others
+made at the same period, time seems to have been no object. Possibly
+the maker was well paid for his work, if not he ought to have been."
+To these observations the workman only gives a sniff in reply. He thinks
+that all this can be quite equalled at the present day, if a fellow
+is really well paid; but this is reckoning with only a part of the
+subject. A further exclamation of admiration comes from his
+chief--"Think, James, what a wonderful draughtsman this old Italian
+was; mind you, this is not a copy, traced from something else as we
+should do now-a-days, but a first idea, an original design; it is in
+some respects a departure from the man's best known patterns, good as
+them, however, although differing; look at the way those lines run from
+point to point, what ease! the tenderness with which the sound holes
+are drawn, the lightness and freedom! that man was a born artist if
+ever there was one!" Another sniff from James, who doesn't believe in
+born anything, but that good work comes with good tools and a reasonable
+prospect ahead of good remuneration for extra trouble. "Don't see, sir,
+why we can't put a bit of purfling round as clean as that! some of those
+French copies are as cleanly purfled as any part of this!" He is
+released from the necessity of further illustration by his chief
+interposing: "Quite true, James, and if these mechanical copyists had
+put as much energy into efforts at truly original and artistic designs
+as they have in copying that which seems to have been laid down for
+their guidance, they would have advanced very many steps further than
+they have done in the essentials of the art--in the highest sense of
+the term--of making violins. But we must get to work, there are lots
+of repairs of all sorts for us to get through the next fortnight, and
+as there is comparatively little anxious work about this job we will
+get it out of hand!"
+
+The violin is now subjected to another and final inspection before the
+active treatment is commenced. "How about that wormhole, James, that
+we were worrying over before the separation of the upper table?"
+"That's just what I've been looking at, sir, and as it doesn't go more
+than a quarter of an inch into the wood--I've tried it with this bit
+of wire--the maker must have cut this bit of pine from a worm-eaten
+log, perhaps because it was old and likely to give a good tone!" "There
+you're wrong, James!" the chief interposes--he is rather inclined to
+snub his assistant when that essentially practical man gives any
+indication of a flight of fancy--"the 'worm' is no sign of age, I have
+known it to affect wood that has been cut but a year before its discovery,
+and do you think those old Italians were such fools as to make fiddles
+that would be only fit to be heard when tried by their descendants two
+hundred years after they died?" James collapses, and getting a basin
+with some warm water, a cloth and a piece of sponge, proceeds to smear
+the latter up and down and round the sides of the instrument. The sponge
+and water soon show signs of the work in hand. "Very dirty, sir, hasn't
+been washed for a hundred years, I should think! There's a ticket, too,
+but I can't make out much of it. I'll wash it over a bit." He then begins
+to try the deciphering, taking one letter at a time. "There's a large
+H at one part, the next is A or O and then U or N, and next to it there's
+R or D; its either London or perhaps its one of those we came across
+the other day, Laurentius something." "It's neither one nor the other,"
+his chief almost roars, while rapidly striding across the room to his
+assistant, who hastily hands over the portion of the violin, glad to
+leave the regions of speculation. "There's nothing about that fiddle
+having any connection with any place but Cremona," and the chief bumps
+down into a chair to further study the mysterious ticket. "You have
+not improved that ticket by washing it, the date has gone and the
+greater part of the print; you should never wash a ticket, that is how
+the very large majority of even well preserved ones have lost the date
+or part of it written with ink in which gum has been one of the
+ingredients and which is easily dissolved, the best way after dusting
+it is to get some bread and rub gently over the surface, and if that
+does not bring out the letters or figures you may mostly consider them
+past recovery."
+
+James does not think much of this attempt at instilling wise maxims
+into his prosaic constitution, and replies "I don't think you could
+have seen more letters before I washed the ticket than after, sir, the
+plainest were what I read out, which looked more like London than
+anything else. There was another word underneath which I think was alum,
+that's English, isn't it?" This is intended as a kind of parting shot
+in a contest during which he has been slightly uncomfortable. The chief
+answers rather snappishly, "No! that's Latin. I must tell you that at
+the time so many of the finest fiddles were made the use of Latin was
+very fashionable, being used much on monumental decorations,
+signatures to works of art generally, down to the prescriptions of
+doctors, which we have not got rid of yet; that is the former, the latter
+are always with us and will be. But stop! why, after all, this is not
+the original ticket, I think it is one pasted over another! hand me
+that camel hair brush and the water." This being done, the wetted brush
+is repeatedly passed over the ticket so as to keep it moist till the
+water has soaked through and dissolved sufficiently the glue or gum
+that held it close. After a while, the corner is gently lifted up with
+the aid of a pointed knife, the end caught hold of and pulled; by degrees
+the whole of the upper ticket is lifted off, leaving to the pleased
+eyes of the chief the original ticket in all the better preservation
+for being covered up. "Yes, there it is! I knew I was right, a fine
+Nicolas Amati! I believe that top one is the remains of a Laurentius
+Guadagnini Alumnus Stradivarius, which some wiseacre thought a more
+appropriate title."
+
+The Guadagnini ticket is laid by till dry and then placed in a small
+drawer in which are a number of others of various makers and
+nationalities; it may emerge from its obscurity some day and become
+of use so far as the condition or its legibility will allow.
+
+The upper table is taken in hand again by the chief, turned over
+repeatedly and both sides of the border carefully examined for the
+presence of any cracks, long or short, old or new, the latter being
+scarcely expected, as the assistant is of a sufficiently cautious
+disposition naturally and as yet has not been debited with any charge
+of injury to his work from over haste or carelessness. "There is a very
+small crack at the lower right side about one inch from the centre,
+I think, but let us be certain, have you got your glue in good order?"
+"Quite," is the reply, "fresh and strong too, sir." "Just see if that
+mark is really a crack or not." The assistant takes the portion in hand,
+holds it to the light, examines it from different angles of vision,
+and finally resolves to test it in the following way; holding the plate
+of pine carefully with the left hand, with the right holding a "camel
+hair" dipped in clear water, he passes it over the possible crack, then
+taking the plate again in both hands, with the thumbs placed on each
+side of the mark, the fingers being underneath, it is very gently bent
+backward and forward, and the wetted part closely watched. Presently,
+the water is observed to gradually disappear, having worked its way
+into the crack. "It is one, sir, but quite clean as if newly done."
+By this time, the slight bending, or what is really the case, the
+opening and shutting of the crack by the movement, causes some minute
+white bubbles to appear along the course, these give an indication of
+the extent of the fracture, which is something over an inch in length.
+"I think it is the result of the contraction of the wood from being
+kept in such a dry place, it is not a repairer's crack, which would
+have extended further into the centre," so the chief observes, "get
+the hand vice ready with the paper, and I will hold the parts together."
+At this time, the fresh warm glue is being applied in a similar way
+to that of the clear water, the latter enables the glue to work in or
+follow the course of the moisture, and similar, but whiter, small
+bubbles are seen along the direction of the crack under the
+manipulation as before described. The small hand-vice, having several
+layers of stout white paper or card inserted at the opening or between
+the teeth, is slackened to receive the part of the border to be held
+together. The chief, holding the plate with the fractured part furthest
+from him, and consequently in front of his assistant, it is held in
+position firmly by both hands. "One moment, James!" he exclaims, "this
+border has had little or no wear, and the surface is so fresh, that
+if we use card or paper alone we shall leave a mark of the pressure,
+hand over those thin pieces of cork and let us put them between the
+paper and the metal of the vice, there, that will be better for standing
+the pressure, more elastic you see." The vice under the fresh
+conditions is now applied, the parts of the table or plate are brought
+together accurately and held tightly in position by the fingers, the
+glue exuding from the crack where it can be seen just beyond the reach
+of the paper, the screw is turned tightly by the assistant, and with
+the remark, "that will do," the whole is left to him for placing aside
+while drying.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+GETTING PARTS TOGETHER THAT APPARENTLY DO NOT FIT--THE USE OF BENZINE
+OR TURPENTINE--TREATMENT OF WARPED OR TWISTED LOWER TABLES.
+
+
+"We will now," says the chief, "have a look at that old Brescian violin
+that I bought last week, it is in that set of drawers by the bench there,
+the third from the top." The assistant gives a look in the direction
+that would strike a spectator as expressive of doubt whether a violin
+could be even squeezed by hard pressure into any of the drawers.
+Nevertheless he obeys, opens the drawer, and seeing only a brown paper
+parcel tied with thin string, takes it out and holding it up says, "do
+you mean this paper bag, sir?" "Yes, that is it." The paper bag is
+brought to the table at which the chief is sitting and who undoes the
+string and paper, letting loose a number of begrimed pieces of
+veneer-like wood, some of these fractured, the upper and lower tables
+comprising three parts, a head that some modern makers would think ugly
+enough to cause a nightmare, with its short heavy neck as left by the
+maker about three hundred years back. The condition of the whole
+concern was suggestive of its having been raked up from some out of
+the way dust heap that had, after the oblivion of a century, at last
+caught the eye of a modern sanitary inspector. There was only one sort
+of person to whom it would be at all inviting, that of our chief above
+mentioned. "Now that is what I call a bargain, James," he begins, when
+turning over the pieces one by one; "all perfect, not a part lost. I
+bought it of a dealer in the country who said he could not get the parts
+together, they would not fit, and he was glad to get rid of the lot
+with as little loss as possible." James at this moment has been placing
+the two tables of the violin together and remarks, "I don't think these
+belong, sir, the back is nearly a quarter of an inch shorter than the
+front and narrower too." "Never mind that," is the answer, "the style
+is the same, the purfling, the work and the varnish are the same, it
+was all together at one time and looked well enough, and it will have
+to go together again and possibly look much better, and you will have
+to do it under my instruction, as you proceed, it will repay for all
+the trouble and time spent upon it by its appearance and tone. The man
+who sold it to me said that its former owner told him he had a good
+try at getting it together and failed. This is the direction in which
+they have both made their mistake, they treated the unmechanical old
+Italian work as they would a modern copy of a Cremonese maker, and which
+had been built upon a machine cut block that served for ever so many
+warehouse fiddles; these old Italians had to use the hand bow saw, which
+was not adapted, unless great care was taken, for getting very true
+upright sides, hence the upper and lower tables are as often as not
+differing in size, sometimes the upper is largest, at others the lower.
+Occasionally the length may be the same with the width differing. Now
+you had better set to work and wash all that muck from the pieces, be
+careful not to separate any parts that may be fairly well fixed. I want
+you to do this cleaning in my manner, not that which you were accustomed
+to before coming here. I know the too frequently pursued method of
+putting the whole collection of parts in a tub of water and there
+letting them float about until the glue has dissolved and left the wood,
+but the following is preferable. Firstly, get some hot water sufficient
+for your requirements as you proceed, renewing it occasionally. Your
+piece of sponge you always have ready, and your cotton cloth as usual.
+I have cut down a hog hair brush of half-an-inch in width, you can use
+other sizes according to convenience. Being cut abruptly across, they
+can be used as small scrubbing brushes after dipping in the hot water.
+The advantage is that of your being enabled to leave untouched or even
+dry, certain parts which you are not desirous of interfering with. The
+occasional sopping up with the sponge and cloth will show the progress
+that is made. The dark, dirty glue of the modern fiddle tinker will
+gradually wash off, leaving frequently the ancient, light coloured
+stuff in quite a fresh state and sharply defined, further, it will
+sometimes give you a hint as to the exact position which the adjacent
+pieces held originally. There will not be any necessity for scrubbing
+very hard with the cut-down brushes; if this is done the surface of
+the wood will suffer; a little patience as one part after another is
+cleansed and the whole completely denuded of its covering of dirty glue
+and grime, and it will be perceptible that there is method in this,
+and consequently the most rapid real progress.
+
+"Occasionally there will be found in and about old repairings or
+tinkerings lumps of pitch-like substances, hard or soft as the occasion
+has seemed to the workman to require, or possibly the only stuff
+obtainable, if not with the idea of a damp resisting material. These,
+as you know, will be treated in your usual manner, that is, removing
+with a blunt knife for a large piece and a piece of fine flannel wetted
+with some pure benzine, which having a strong affinity for any oily
+particles, absorbs them rapidly and leaves a clean surface. Spirit of
+turpentine will also answer the purpose, but is less rapid in its action
+and does not evaporate so completely, leaving a slight residuum of
+resin. Alcohol of any degree of strength must be kept quite away from
+the work, as even supposing it specially adapted as a solvent for
+removing the objectionable material that may be found clinging
+anywhere, it has such destructive action upon the old Italian varnishes
+that the slightest drop on the surface will cause irreparable injury.
+Keep it quite clear of your repairing work, it is not absolutely
+necessary under any circumstances, although it is very tempting to a
+slovenly repairer."
+
+We will now suppose that the instructions have been duly carried out,
+the different parts have now resumed their original condition of
+cleanliness and have a wholesome aspect. One or two of the ribs left
+standing and even undisturbed since being placed in position by the
+maker about three centuries back, serve as a guide respecting the
+projection of the edging over the ribs. After carefully noting this,
+and damping round the inner edge, these are removed and placed aside.
+The chief and his assistant are now enabled to thoroughly examine the
+work of this product of a by-gone age. It is none the worse for being
+clean. The comments upon the tool-marks now visible after the
+dispersion of the grime are of a rather opposite character, the
+connoisseur noticing the manner of working over the surface by the old
+Italians as being different to that pursued now; the assistant sees
+nought but rough gougings and scratchings as with a notched or blunted
+tool, and concludes that the old makers were not as good workmen as
+the moderns. "Now, James," says the other, "you have been doing little
+else than repairing since you took up with this business, and have never
+had the opportunity of working a violin from the beginning, straight
+off the stocks, without being drawn away to some other work. Consequent
+upon this your work has not so much distinctive character, much effort
+at mere smoothness being apparent and in excess of good style. These
+old Italians were designing and making new violins day after day for
+their livelihood. Repairing, when they could make equally good, fresh
+instruments, was to them of secondary importance, and so we find
+restorations in the olden times were of a kind we should now call very
+indifferent, if not altogether bad."
+
+The lower table or back of good sycamore is now turned about and well
+scrutinised by James, who now remarks, "this back is warped, I think
+that is why the last two owners could not make the other parts fit well,
+what is to be done with it, we are not likely to make a better job of
+it than they were with a back twisted like that?" The reply is, "that
+old Brescian maker was not likely to turn out a new violin with such
+a twisted spine! that condition has arisen since and is not a
+constitutional defect, it has been caused by damp and straining, and
+being repaired while in the strained condition, it retained the twist;
+we must alter that. Fortunately, the back is in one piece, so we shall
+not have the trouble about the joint, although with the necessary extra
+care the treatment would have to be much the same. Now, first of all,
+get a cotton cloth sufficiently large when folded once or twice to cover
+a surface such as the violin back presents. It must now be well soaked
+with water till it holds as much as possible without dripping. The
+violin table will now be placed with the varnished side downwards, the
+wetted cloth placed over it. Be sure that the surfaces of cloth and
+wood are in contact by gently dabbing it down all over. It can now be
+placed aside for about three or four hours in order that the moisture
+may soak into the wood for some depth. Meanwhile we may determine upon
+and get ready the means whereby the warping, as far as possible, if
+not wholly, may be got rid of. It must be borne in mind that the wood
+which was cut in its natural state from the tree and mostly with the
+grain, will be disposed, under the influence of damp, to return to the
+original form or condition in a more or less degree. Under good
+management, that is to say, with a sufficient amount of damp and no
+more, it almost seems to try to resume its old condition. This will
+be borne out by watching the effect of much wet upon any wood that has
+been previously bent into shape, or upon the separated ribs of a violin.
+The efforts of the wood to return to its original conformation will
+be apparent in the instance of the ribs, perhaps provoking, as the
+re-bending without injuring the varnish, which may happen to be of the
+most lustrous and delicate description, is often a matter of great
+difficulty, and at times an impossibility."
+
+It was for the purpose of avoiding the risk of such defacement that
+the brushing away of the glue and grime by parts at a time was
+recommended, although the time consumed by taking the parts in detail
+may often be a drawback. If the ribs are quite saturated, as when left
+to float in water, they will be sure to come out nearly straight, and
+the varnish, if not of the kind that has been worked well into the wood,
+irrecoverably spoilt. Even when quite so, the trouble does not end here,
+for the wood having taken nearly its own form again, will have to be
+bent, with all its attendant troubles, into shape. Complete saturation
+of any part of the violin should therefore be avoided.
+
+The "making" or arrangement of whatever may be needful for getting rid
+of the warp or twist of the back plate will now have to be decided upon.
+There is generally more than one way of getting over a mechanical
+difficulty, and in the present instance there may be many, but the one
+promising to be most successful and offering the least number of
+obstacles to success will have attention. The repairer takes in hand
+some of the softest wood obtainable, say American pine, or if any is
+easily obtainable, poplar; that kind known as "black poplar" is perhaps
+as free from hard thread as any, a couple or more of slabs about three
+or four inches wide and two or three longer than the upper and lower
+widths of the back, with about a quarter of an inch of thickness. An
+opening is bored in each, one in which the upper or smaller part will
+pass through, the other sufficiently large to admit the lower or larger
+half. The opening must of course be enough for admission of the rise
+or modelling and a little more. The object of this will soon be apparent.
+When the inner surface of the back plate has absorbed sufficient
+moisture from the wet cloth, this being so in the judgment of the
+operator, the wood will have lost very much of its resisting power to
+twisting by the hands. Advantage is taken of this condition, and each
+piece or collar of wood passed over the proper portion of the back like
+a loop. If fitting tolerably close, all the better; but it may require
+a soft wedge or two in parts to keep it from shifting after being placed
+in position. In some instances more than two or even three or four
+pieces may be of advantage where the tendency to twist is irregular.
+The operator now gets a short plank of ordinary wood, of even surface,
+straight, and true as possible in each direction; lifting the violin
+table with the loops of wood attached and placing it on the plank, some
+of the loops will be raised up on one side while others are depressed
+at the same. In the case of the simple warp, one of the two will vary
+in rise or a different angle to the plane. The process now is simple,
+and the loop rising at one side will be pressed down and held in position
+by either a weight or any contrivance handy. It should be done a little
+more than seems necessary for restoring the even line of the edging,
+which can be fairly well seen by looking along from end to end; this
+is to allow of a slight recoil when the loops or wooden cramps are
+removed.
+
+For a more determined twist the extra depression of one part can be
+accomplished by inserting layers of wood under the opposing parts so
+as to get more distance for the remaining one.
+
+Nothing is now required but the drying thoroughly. This will be
+according to temperature and moisture present in the atmosphere; no
+artificial means should be resorted to.
+
+Not the slightest injury will accrue from the process described,
+provided due care is taken that there is no overstraining, and the
+damping is neither excessive nor insufficient. The result of the former
+is likely to be an inequality in the bending, the line or level of the
+edging when looked at along its course, will look uneven, as if some
+upheaval had taken place here and there. Courage and caution are
+faculties brought to bear strongly and continuously on the subject by
+every repairer with a reputation for success. Without the former, many
+attempts which might have ended successfully have proved to be failures
+and to require doing over again; and insufficiency of the latter is
+what is so strongly evident in a very large majority of so-called
+"restored" violins. The cases may have been considered by the repairers
+as requiring heroic treatment, overstraining, excision of an
+unnecessary amount of the old wood, making too much of a clean sweep
+of parts that may have afforded food and lodging for bore worms being
+too evident, besides the saving of time and trouble.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+REMOVAL OF OLD SUPERFLUOUS GLUE BY DAMPING--REPLACING OLD END BLOCKS
+BY NEW ONES--TEMPORARY BEAMS AND JOISTS INSIDE FOR KEEPING RIBS, ETC.,
+IN POSITION WHILE FRESHLY GLUED.
+
+
+To the workroom we will again return. The back has had ample time to
+dry while the assistant James has been doing other work of an ordinary
+or trifling character. The loops or collars are gently released, put
+aside for future use, and the now much less warped back is brought for
+the chief's inspection. "That will do, James, nicely, I think, now you
+will be able to go ahead with the other parts, and perhaps we shall
+be successful enough when the whole is finished to make those people,
+when they see it, rather regretful at their hasty disposal of the paper
+full of scraps of old Brescia. While we are in the bending mood, however,
+we will get that Lorenzo Guadagnini into a little better trim, you left
+it on that shelf over there last week." James fetches it, a rather
+woe-begone affair to an ordinary observer; it had been cut open, the
+head sawn off, placed inside, the upper table laid on and a string
+passed round the waist and tied with a loose knot. "Look at it, James,
+and tell me what is wrong and the remedy." The string is untied, and
+the parts laid on the bench and examined one by one. "In excellent
+preservation, sir, in most respects, although it has been opened many
+times and a heap of glue left about it." An inch rule is taken up and
+passed over the separated parts for comparison; some slight expression
+of amazement passes over James's features, re-measurement ensues, and
+turning to his chief he remarks, "I didn't see that at first, sir, it's
+worse than that old Brescian; just look here, sir, the ribs are not
+upright, but bending inwardly; across the upper part they are so much
+out of the perpendicular that when the upper table is laid carefully
+on, instead of there being the eighth of an inch of overlapping border
+it is nearly a quarter of an inch each side; and what is more curious,
+the ribs do not seem to have been unglued since they were first put
+there, excepting a small part at the upper and lower ends, and see,
+sir, when I put the upper table on it is like an arch, and to press
+that part down on to the ribs will send a crack along from the sound
+hole on either side, which will simply be breaking up the whole affair
+by degrees." "Well, what method would you propose for correcting all
+this and making a good restoration of it, James? Give it a look over
+carefully and tell me." The assistant well knows the attendant
+circumstances connected with a good restoration or a bad one; if left
+as it is, it may be sold "in the trade" for so much, if badly restored
+it will fetch less, if well done it will be worth to the outside world
+a considerable sum, and if it should go well as regards the emission
+of its doubtless fine tone, the value as a whole would be greatly
+enhanced. Much thinking and careful calculation is therefore
+concentrated on the subject, and after awhile James says, "Well, sir,
+this lot of glue all round may as well come off first as last, there's
+no doing anything with it as it is." With this his chief agrees; so
+he sets to work, not with a chisel or any cutting instrument, he is
+so far advanced in his methodical working to know from experience that
+it is next to impossible to avoid injuring the sharply defined and level
+edge of the rib as left by the maker originally if such rough treatment
+as filing, chipping or cutting is resorted to; he therefore adopts a
+milder course of treatment. Taking a few pieces of cotton cloth or white
+sheeting--old calico is equally efficient--he folds them into several
+layers, and when so about four inches long by about three-quarters of
+an inch in width. Nearly a dozen of these are got ready. After being
+soaked in water, they are taken out and slightly squeezed so that they
+no longer drip. One by one they are placed all round on the edge of
+the ribs close to each other so that no vacant space is perceptible
+between each, and after a gentle patting down with the fingers along
+the course they are left to do their work quietly, more effectively,
+too, by far, than any steel tool with the brute force necessary for
+ploughing through that most obstinate of materials, hard, dry glue.
+These folds of cotton material James calls his poultices for drawing
+the impurities away from the system; they, in the present instance,
+afford him time to think over the sort of engineering that will task
+his energies to some extent.
+
+Leaving the poultices to their work, the old Brescian is again taken
+in hand under the direction of the chief. "Now, James, let us look over
+the parts again. The next step must be getting the end blocks attached
+to the back. We have got that into a tolerably straight line again,
+so that we can work on the affair almost like a new fiddle. Those old
+blocks, well I should like to retain them if possible, but on looking
+over them very little discernment is sufficient to conclude that fresh
+ones will be not only better but necessary. In the first place, they
+are very small, were roughly cut in the first instance, and since have
+been meddled with by would-be restorers; good new ones properly fitted
+will be far better than old ones added to, necessarily for strength.
+Some of that old pine, or as good, that French willow will suit our
+purpose. We will choose the latter. See that the grain runs
+perpendicularly or at right angles with the cut surface that is to be
+glued down. Chop or split it, don't saw it into shape, and then you
+can finish it off when glued into position, when you will not find you
+have to cut against the grain." This, as a matter of course, is
+conformed to, the blocks split off the bulk or plank, sawn to a little
+over the proper length or height to allow of finishing, and then the
+surface to be glued is made even and squared with the part against which
+the ribs will be hereafter glued. The lower end one will of course
+require a trifle of curving to allow of the ribs following the course
+of the curve of the border; this the assistant duly sees to by trying
+it in position until it appears to be satisfactory. The parts of the
+blocks to be left facing the interior of the violin he leaves roughly
+done to shape and size of those in modern violins, that being found
+the best from experience since the demise of the old masters of Italy.
+The upper one is left more protuberant, or nearly semi-circular; the
+reason for this is that the strain upon both upper and lower table at
+this end is greater than at any other part, therefore if the block is
+too narrow there is not enough grip or extent of glued surface, a
+frequent result of which is the lowering of the fingerboard, and a
+buckling of the surface underneath of the upper table, a condition much
+to the detriment of the proper emission of the tone. Great attention
+should always be paid this particular part. Many repairers seem fearful
+that the air-space of the interior of the violin will be lessened by
+a projecting block. A little consideration will enable them to see that
+for effectiveness of purpose the form of the interior of almost any
+violin will not--from its curved surface--allow of an over large block
+with a flat glueing surface above and below.
+
+These conditions having been seen to, the assistant with some freshly
+made glue paints over the surfaces of the ends that will be fastened
+to the lower table. As this is to be for a permanency, the glueing must
+be of the best. When dry, the surface is scraped even and the usual
+glueing and cramping done.
+
+To Lorenzo Guadagnini again; sufficient time being allowed for the
+moisture in the folds of cotton to affect and be absorbed by the glue,
+the assistant fetches it from its enforced retirement, brings it to
+the light carefully, lifts up one of the poultices, touches the glue
+with the tip of a small knife and is satisfied. The glue has been
+softened and is now little more than a jelly attached to the prominent
+parts of the ribs. The first thing will be to get some rag or paper,
+place it handy and remove one of the wet pads or poultices, then with
+the small knife, kept for such purposes, being blunt and worn smooth,
+the glue or jelly is carefully scraped away. The advantage of using
+the blunt knife will be evident, as it does not cut the surface as it
+passes over it. The point is occasionally used for any corner that may
+require it. After this a small sponge or rag dipped in warm water is
+passed over the edges and removes what is left untouched by the knife.
+This is repeated with each separate pad in succession all round and
+when completed the work is put aside and allowed to dry. A previous
+examination of the inside surface of the upper table had shown the
+necessity of similar treatment, but not to such an extent.
+
+Not much time expires before the assistant brings the parts before his
+chief. "As clean almost as when new," is the exclamation of the latter;
+"it really wants little more than a new or proper bar and then glueing
+together." "Yes, but about that difference of measurement, sir, across
+the upper and lower parts." Here the assistant takes the upper table
+and places it like a lid on a box; turning it back downwards for better
+inspection, he says, "it's nearly a quarter of an inch out, the border
+overlaps frightfully, you would not glue it up like that, would you,
+sir?" "Certainly not," says the other, without the least sign of
+annoyance on his features. Turning to his man he says, "Now, James,
+here is a nice little instance where you can study with much interest
+and profit the subject of cause and effect. You drew my attention to
+the excellent preservation, and you have removed what appeared to you
+at first sight the only impediment to perfect restoration, that of the
+coarse glueing. You have rightly observed that the back has never been
+removed, and yet the ribs bend inwardly when tested and seem to require
+a smaller upper table. The reason is plain after you have given the
+matter some right consideration. The maker, as you know, was an
+excellent artificer and was a pupil of the great Stradivari. Now here
+is the cause; the violin has been, as you know, opened several times
+by persons more or less unfitted for the proper performance of such
+an operation, fiddle tinkers I call them, and with a pot of thick dirty
+brown and repulsive looking glue, have with a coarse brush dabbed it
+all round and then screwed the lid down. The successors in this ghastly
+process have not had the decency to treat the instrument as worthy of
+much care, and so with dirty cloths and glue have again repeated the
+work, if it may be dignified by such a term, spoliation is perhaps a
+better one. Now we know that the violin has been separated and left
+so, being merely tied up, and been in that dirty little den of ravening
+wolves or tinker dealers for nobody knows how long, with the rays of
+the sun falling on it for many days; the result is as we see, the back
+has contracted and drawn the ribs in to some extent, it is glue-bound,
+we will set it free, the wood itself will help us, as if glad to resume
+its former occupation; give me that soft brush with clean water." This
+being handed to him, the chief with repeated and careful strokes and
+dippings of the brush passes over the surface, going round but leaving
+untouched the label, which seems to have remained undisturbed: the
+joint down the centre is avoided in a similar way. After some time,
+as the moisture has penetrated the wood, he turns to the assistant,
+saying, "now, James, try the front on"; this is done, and the latter,
+thinking he will just catch his master, says, "fits exactly now, sir!
+but won't it come back again beautifully as it dries." "Well, that is
+just what we are going to prevent, James; while this is wet, cut some
+soft sticks of wood and place them across from one side to the other,
+don't wedge them in tightly, as many as will keep up an even pressure
+all along." This does not take long, the sticks are inserted like so
+many little joists across, and the curious looking structure is once
+more placed aside to dry.
+
+While James was cutting and then placing the sticks of various lengths
+across, his chief was close by suggesting now and then some trifling
+variation in the adjustment. "Don't put them all with the same strain,
+give a look now and then as you proceed, in order to ensure against
+an over amount of pressure--there, that will be enough! if too much
+against the large curves, it will bulge out too far, and the shape will
+go." While proceeding he was now and then cautioned as to this kind
+of insertion of pieces or joists. Very frequently old Italian
+instruments of free design are most unequal in their curves, one side
+having a different curving to the other; they are, indeed, seldom
+exactly the same on both sides, as modern makers try to make them. It
+will be evident, then, that care must be taken that a flat or large
+curve should be treated with more or less pressure than other parts.
+(Diag. 36.) When this inequality is very apparent, a double system of
+joists must be adopted thuswise, get two pieces of strong wood, say
+plain light mahogany, some three-quarters or an inch in thickness, and
+square along its course. The ends are to be cut so that they will rest
+within the body of the instrument easily, barely touching each end
+between the upper and lower linings, if at all. The two ends will touch
+or rest against the upper and lower end blocks and the pressure, when
+the sticks are placed across, will be against these, the pushing
+outward of parts of the ribs or linings being regulated to a nicety.
+Should one or more of the sticks or joists be accidentally cut too short,
+a small wedge of soft wood inserted at either end as may be deemed best
+will correct matters. As the violin at present under consideration is
+suffering from simple contraction and the linings are fairly stout,
+the joists will be arranged so as to keep up a gentle pressure on the
+upper ones. A very considerable amount of effective restoration can
+be done by means of this system of joists carried out with judgment.
+The two large supports,--sometimes one only may be necessary,--will
+be found of great use for a variety of purposes other than the one being
+referred to; they can be used not only for pressing against, but for
+the opposite, as when a rib or portion of it has from some
+cause--perhaps fracture or thinness--bulged outwardly. It will be
+perceptible at once that for direct pressure against a part of the ribs,
+situated near the upper block, that the little joist will slip unless
+a nick is made for its reception in the large support or beam. This
+is so evident that a reminder seems scarcely necessary.
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 36.]
+
+When it so happens that contraction must be resorted to on a rib or
+part, it has to be brought back; then one, two or more holes may be
+bored in the mahogany beam and recourse made to some bent iron wire,
+which, perhaps, has the preference in use over other material, as it
+can be shaped or pressed to a curve, one end being inserted in a hole,
+the other placed outside the offending part and with a soft pad or wood
+wedge against the old material to be brought back.
+
+The special advantage of iron wire is that it can be gently hammered
+into such form as will enable just enough pressure to be exerted at
+any particular place as may be thought proper. This is, of course,
+assuming that some iron substance is at hand that will answer the
+purpose of an anvil. The thickness of the iron wire must depend upon
+the requirements and size of the work in repair, a viola of course
+taking stouter wire than a violin, a 'cello still more so. A useful
+average for violin work would be an eighth of an inch diameter. Strong
+wire however is not always to hand, time also is occasionally short;
+when so, wood must be resorted to, cutting it with a sharp knife to
+a form that will clasp or allow of the requisite purchase at any point;
+more room, however, is taken up with this method, and possibly not so
+much at a time will be accomplished.
+
+A stock of soft wood in the plank should always be at hand on a
+repairer's premises, soft American pine of about a quarter of an inch
+thick being very useful for all sorts of purposes in connection with
+the "making," as it is termed in the business.
+
+Supposing now that a reasonable time has elapsed for the thorough
+drying out of all damp, the assistant is now requested to bring both
+the old Italian violins for inspection by his chief. The latter gives
+a look over both in turn, and says, "I think you may take those sticks
+out of the Guadagnini, it must be dry enough by this time." This being
+done, the upper tables of both are fetched and tried on, "there," says
+the chief, "they fit as near as we want them to, and we might almost
+say they cured themselves." As the Guadagnini had nothing further to
+be done to it, James is told to proceed with the glueing and closing
+up.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+RE-OPENING THE BACK TO CORRECT THE BADLY REPAIRED JOINT--A FEW WORDS
+ON STUDS--FILLING UP SPACES LEFT BY LOST SPLINTERS--MATCHING WOOD FOR
+LARGE CRACKS, ETC.
+
+
+Regarding the glueing and closing up process, we will defer the matter
+for the present. While the assistant is going through the necessary
+routine in connection with that most important part of the repairing
+of a violin, the master has been looking over a few of the things that
+are to be operated upon some time or other. Going to a sort of store
+cupboard, he fetches from thence a violin in fair condition generally,
+but with one sad defect, the back has at one time been open, that is,
+the joint down the middle, either through damp affecting the glue or
+from violence, had parted and had been badly repaired; the two surfaces
+being brought together and glued, but not evenly, one side being a
+trifle higher than the other. "James," he calls out, "this old Pesaro
+fiddle is worth putting right; when you have finished what you are about,
+put the wet rags on this as far along the joint as may be necessary,
+set them better and closer, it is the fine varnish all over that will
+make it worth while."
+
+James having finished the closing up of the Guadagnini and taken the
+instrument with its array of screw cramps into a place where it could
+repose uninterfered with until quite dry, returns and looks over the
+violin just brought forth from its retirement. "It seems to me, sir,
+this back will have to come off before we can properly bring those two
+halves together." The other scans the work again, turns it over, tries
+its strength between his fingers and thumbs, and concludes with "Well,
+I think you are right, it is quite worth the extra labour and had better
+be done so." The matter being settled, James takes a seat, and, with
+the violin resting on his lap and held by his left hand, the broad bladed
+knife in his right is inserted with a carefully calculated thrust
+underneath the border and edging. There is not much difficulty;
+sometimes the violin is turned in a contrary direction when there is
+a disposition for the grain to tear up here and there.
+
+At last the back is free, the corners and blocks have caused a little
+trouble in the progress of the knife around, the wood being hard and
+tough on both sides of the knife. It would have been slower work with
+a violin of later and more careful construction. In the present
+instance there are no linings to struggle with. "Now," says the workman,
+"we can get to work at this joint much more easily."
+
+After being examined again by both, the rags are again brought into
+requisition. The back is laid varnished side downwards and a "poultice"
+applied as far along the joint as appears necessary. Meanwhile other
+work, such as fitting and finishing, is proceeded with.
+
+A proper length of time has to elapse,--in the present instance it will
+be longer than that for the purpose of merely softening the glue. The
+damp has to work its way down at the junction of the two parts, a rather
+slow process at the best of times; the back now under treatment being
+of full average thickness causes some extra time to be taken up.
+
+After repeated examinations, the joint, being gently tried each time,
+gives evidence of the glue having softened. "You must clear out that
+black stuff," interposes the chief, when the rag or poultice has been
+lifted off. James accordingly, having some warm water and a small
+hog-haired brush already to hand, proceeds to gently scrub the brush
+along the course where the ugly black line is seen. It is necessary
+to do this both sides, the varnished one receiving milder attention
+than the other. Frequent dippings of the brush in water, gently
+scrubbing away the glue and wiping the brush on a cloth, working the
+joint backward and forward between the fingers, are details of the
+process gone through in a leisurely yet business-like manner; much care
+is exercised that no strain is made on the good and unwetted part of
+the joint.
+
+At last the old glue having by degrees been got rid of, the outer
+moisture is absorbed by a gentle wiping of the cloth along the course
+of the joint.
+
+The next movement is simply putting the plate away to dry. To attempt
+any glueing together of the parts while they are swollen with moisture
+would be to make matters worse than before, as the edges are too soft
+to bear interference, besides which, the sharpness of them is difficult
+to perceive while wet and semi-transparent.
+
+We will now, after the time allowed for drying, see the work proceeding
+under the hands of the workman. After trying the parts, that is,
+bringing the separated edges together for seeing whether a fresh and
+clean join can be effected, some soft wood at hand is cut for the
+combined purposes of mould and cramp. The piece used is about nine
+inches long by about one in width and a quarter of an inch thick. Marking
+off on this thickness, and a trifle over the greatest width of the back,
+the lower part of which is to be inserted, wood is cut away to the depth
+of about a quarter of an inch; within this again a further cutting is
+made to fit the modelling or rise of the curve of the back. This will
+admit the plate loosely. On placing it within, the two halves are
+squeezed together by soft wood wedges of necessary size inserted
+between the edges of the plate and the wood cramp; if necessary, another
+wedge on one side or the other of the joint is placed for bringing both
+to a proper level. After trying this without glue, the pieces are
+removed, glue of good strength is put on the surfaces to be joined and
+the whole put in position again. The lower end of the joint near the
+purfling will require a little additional cramping together.
+
+This part of the process is one of the very few instances where more
+than a couple of hands are of advantage, if not of actual necessity,
+the reason being that the two parts or halves of the back which have
+to be brought to an exact level must be held in position by two hands
+very firmly, while a cramp (with paper padding and cork between the
+teeth) is screwed rather tightly by another person. It is then as usual
+laid by to dry.
+
+After a satisfactory time has elapsed, the wooden tie, mould or cramp,
+as we may call it, with its small wedges is removed, the metal screw
+cramp at the end is unfastened, the paper removed, and the joint is
+found to be much improved, if not quite up to the original state as
+when new. There is of course some superfluous glue to be cleared away,
+this having oozed out when the glue was first applied, there is also
+a portion of paper adhering where the screw cramp was attached over
+the border. This is done by wiping with a damp rag until it is clear,
+finishing with a dry one.
+
+There is yet a little more attention necessary at times when the
+repairing of a back of the kind just described has been gone through.
+Backs of violins of a standard of excellence both high and low are not
+always as robust in their substance as might be desirable, so when a
+trifle weak there is more strain on the middle line or joint than when
+the wood is stout. In this case a few studs are advisable. On this detail
+of repairing nearly always resorted to by repairers, a few words will
+not be out of place. For the present we will only treat of the back.
+The size, disposition and shape of these is by no means an unimportant
+matter. At various times and places different sizes and shapes have
+been the fashion. Often apparently merely a matter of caprice, these
+strengthening discs have been used to such an extent, both in size and
+number, as to defeat the very object the restorer has had in view. No
+repairer would think it worth while to cramp or keep pressed down by
+any means the studs that he may think proper to place in position. To
+obviate this he uses very strong glue; if a good workman he will see
+that the course along which the studs are to lie is quite clean, a slight
+washing with a brush or sponge will set this right.
+
+Now it follows as a matter of course that the surface of the part, owing
+to the modelling, is somewhat concave, and so as the studs are
+invariably cut from a flat strip of veneer, if they are very large,
+the glue in hardening and of course shrinking during the process will
+leave a hollow space in the middle, or maybe on one side, where the
+drying happens to commence. There will be thus a lessening of the
+strengthening by the stud, and sometimes a jarring of the loose parts,
+giving an immense amount of trouble in finding out the obscure seat
+of the nuisance when the instrument may be otherwise in good order.
+
+There should be then a distinct limit to the size of any studs that
+experience and judgment may dictate as indispensable. Three-eighths
+of an inch square may be taken as the limit to which it is safe to go.
+
+The studs should be cut from fairly stout veneer, and for the present
+purpose, that of the back, usually of sycamore, the same kind of wood
+is preferable to any other.
+
+They should be trimmed so as not to require much if any finishing when
+attached and dried, as all trimming with edged tools afterwards is
+likely to be attended by occasional slips of the chisel.
+
+The glue at hand being fresh and very strong, a piece of steel wire
+or knitting needle of convenient length will be a desideratum, the
+point being stuck in slightly and only deep enough to enable the stud
+to be lifted thereby and held upside down while a globule of glue is
+laid or dropped upon it. It is then turned over and laid on the desired
+spot and pressed there.
+
+If the point of the needle is nicely polished it will allow of pressing,
+and a turn round will release it, leaving the stud in position; if on
+the other hand the point is too prolonged, rough and sharp, the stud
+will probably be pulled off again. It will thus be perceptible that
+the best shape will be rather obtuse but very smooth. When the stud
+is in position and the glue setting or chilling, an additional pressure
+with a small rod of wood or hard material will drive the glue out from
+the edges and the work may be left to itself.
+
+A word or two as to shape. Sometimes circular discs of sycamore are
+met with, at others square. Lozenge shape is frequently met with, and
+this I am inclined to favour most, as there being an acute angle at
+each end there is a corresponding increase of holding surface with the
+least amount of wood. These should be cut so that the grain does not
+run with that of the joint, nor in exact opposition to it, but
+diagonally.
+
+There is a method much to be deprecated that was fashionable in some
+parts of Europe in the last century, of strengthening the middle joint
+of the back by first cutting out a lozenge or square space and then
+fitting and filling with a stud. When dry, the parts are levelled and
+glass-papered over. This system, although looking very neat, the
+surface being quite smooth, will hold good for a time, but when this
+has elapsed with wear and damp attacking it, the supposed remedy is
+much worse than the disease, the whole joint being in danger of
+disarrangement and splitting, necessitating even further heroic
+treatment.
+
+Should the studs when firm and dry seem to require a little finish,
+the chisel must be carefully handled with angular or sharpened surface
+downwards, the thinnest shavings being taken carefully off. A slight
+touching with glass paper may be allowed to take away the crudeness
+of the chisel marks.
+
+When breakages of different degrees have to be treated at other parts
+of the back, small studs may be used, particularly when the fractures
+are fresh, free from dirt and fit well. In these instances, after the
+glueing together has been effected, studs of not more than a full eighth
+of an inch will be found sufficient. It is scarcely necessary to add
+that they may be thinner in substance also. If, however, there be
+sufficient substance of wood, the fractures and joints brought well
+together and fitting closely and neatly, then studs are better
+dispensed with altogether, the simplicity of the whole being less
+impaired.
+
+It must be always borne in mind that the smaller the amount of fresh
+wood introduced into an injured violin the better. In instances where
+a part is lost or so broken as to be little less than pulverised, there
+is only one course open, that of paring down the sides of the aperture
+so that the fresh wood may be accurately fitted to it.
+
+The back being repaired to the chief's satisfaction, the instrument
+is further closely examined in order that any other damage which may
+be discovered shall be seen to for a time convenient for the final
+closing and fitting up. Just at the moment announcement is made of the
+arrival of a parcel directed to the chief, "With care, fragile."
+
+"Another patient for our hospital," he observes. "Oh, it's from that
+professor who was here some time since. I thought from his remarks and
+careless manner he was a likely man to lead his violin into danger,
+if not into inextricable difficulties; let us see what is the matter.
+Open the box, James, take the fiddle out, there is probably a letter
+placed with it to save postage." James dutifully proceeds with the work
+while his chief retires to make a short note concerning some other
+matters.
+
+"You're right, sir, there is a dirty envelope stuck between the strings
+and fingerboard." This is taken away and handed to the chief, who runs
+a small knife along the edge and releases the epistle, which runs as
+follows:--
+
+SIR,--In this morning I have great trouble as I walk the stairs down
+my violin chest open itself, and my violin go to the bass, and when
+I was to pick him up he was bad break in one two place. I am sorry to
+come to you as good doctor to finish him soon, and please charge no
+large.
+
+Truly yours,
+HERMANN GROSZHAAR.
+
+"Capital English for him," says the chief, to which James answers in
+a careless sort of undertone, "There's a little English, but less
+capital about him, wanted to borrow five bob from me when he came last."
+
+The violin, after being taken from the case, is closely examined by
+the chief, who turns it round about, tapping it here and there and
+holding it up to the light. At last, handing it to James he says:--"Not
+so much as I should have expected after the terrible occurrence
+described in the letter; the fiddle is a good one, so it deserves proper
+attention, no matter who owns it. Just look about the case and find
+if you can the small piece that has come from this place in the front
+table."
+
+James looks earnestly about the interior of the violin case without
+success. "No sign of it here, sir, there's nothing at all but a little
+bit of sweetstuff," he says, taking out a small white disc from one
+of the side pockets.
+
+"Well, we must proceed to work without it, so get that box out with
+the odd pieces of old wood; I've no doubt you will find a piece that
+will match the grain of the pine to a nicety; we must have the upper
+table off, better do it first."
+
+This proceeding, of a kind as described before, having occupied some
+minutes, the upper table is held by the chief while the assistant gropes
+among the odds and ends of pine and in a minute or two finds a piece
+which is pronounced to suit admirably. "Now, James, there appears to
+be only this portion seriously injured, and another, almost a splinter,
+running along the part adjoining. It will be compulsory to cut a
+well-squared opening for the fitting, you will be careful to make the
+walls of this part contract as the descent is made, so that the wood
+inserted is slightly wedge-shaped. You will at the same time be careful
+and bear in mind that this fresh wood will have to match so nicely,
+that when inserted properly the threads or grain will appear continuous
+and not broken to the eye of any person but the experienced critic.
+To please this person, however, you will have not only to make the lines
+of the grain follow through evenly, but so fit your wood as to be in
+the direction of the growth of the plank from which the table was cut.
+You see this aperture is on the slant or curve about midway between
+the bridge and part near the tail-piece. Many repairers, even when
+inserting fresh wood with exceeding neatness, neglect this precaution,
+and, in consequence, when the part is finished and varnished over,
+there is but little indication of repair when looked at from one
+standpoint, but from another or a removal of the light, this fault is
+very conspicuous. A frequent attempt to conceal this is made by
+covering the part with dull varnish that will not allow of much light
+passing through; sometimes an entirely opaque plastering is pasted
+over, obscuring the grain of the old and new wood alike in the locality,
+and thus making what is known as a botch."
+
+For the execution of such repairs as these there will not be any
+necessity to open the violin. They will really be more conveniently
+effected without, there being more support and leverage where
+required.
+
+A long crack while fresh will take the glue readily and be as secure
+as required when dry. It should be placed along the line to the extreme
+ends or a little over, and with gentle pressure alternately each side
+the glue will be gradually drawn in. This should be continued for some
+time, until there is little disposition shown for more absorption.
+
+The superfluous glue will now be wiped off; should there be any tendency
+on one side or the other to remain higher, thus causing a ridge which
+must be most carefully guarded against, a piece of tape or ribbon tied
+round the violin at the part, and a small wedge of soft wood inserted
+between the tape and the elevated edge, will bring it to a proper level,
+when it may be put aside to dry and harden.
+
+When sufficient time has elapsed for this according to atmospheric
+conditions, the binding may be removed and the surface along the crack
+wiped with a damp rag until only the line is apparent.
+
+If the foregoing is done neatly and cleanly, there will be very little
+evidence of damage remaining. In such instances as the present there
+may be occasionally necessary two, three or more bindings with proper
+wedges, according to the length of the crack, the size of the violin
+and the model. If the latter is rather high, or of the kind called by
+our French neighbours _bombe_, the disinclination for the edges to come
+evenly together without help will be much greater, and therefore
+binders and wedges should be at once made ready after a glance at the
+model.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+REPAIRING LOST PORTIONS--MARGINS OF SOUND HOLES--MATCHING THE
+GRAIN--FIXING AND FINISHING OFF--REPLACING WITH FRESH WOOD LARGE
+PORTIONS OF UPPER TABLE--LOST PARTS OF PURFLING--RESTORING IT WITH OLD
+STUFF.
+
+
+As the repairing now under consideration is of a kind requiring not
+only skill, but experience in the handling of the tools and necessary
+appliances connected therewith, we will still suppose ourselves in the
+trained repairer's rooms at the rear of his premises, and that
+professors and amateurs frequently call at the shop in front with
+violins of various kinds with all sorts of injuries that they are
+desirous of having put right.
+
+Just at this moment a lady of highly fashionable appearance glides in,
+followed by her footman carrying a violin case. She has brought a violin
+that has been laid aside and forgotten for a long time at a friend's
+house, for generations in fact, it used to be in repute as a violin
+by Cremona. It has been given to her daughter, who is making great
+progress under the guidance of one of the most eminent performers of
+the day, and she wishes to have it put in good playing order if it is
+worth the expense.
+
+The footman obediently brings forward the case, unfastens the string
+that holds the lid down, the hinges being out of working condition,
+and places it on the counter; the lid being raised, a strong mousy odour
+comes forth.
+
+Our chief takes the violin from the hands of the man and turns it over,
+raises his eyebrows and remarks, "Yes, madam, the violin has been sadly
+neglected, the case having been left open mice have been residing in
+the snug retreat afforded them." "Yes," is the lady's rejoinder, "I
+believe the case was found a little way open, my friends have not been
+musical at any time and took no interest in the matter. Is it a good
+violin, Mr. ----?"
+
+"Good, madam? it is very fine, one of the masterpieces of Cremona. The
+mice have turned the sound-holes into doorways, the nibblings have gone
+nearly half through one of the wings."
+
+"Wings!" says the lady. "I was not aware of there being any wings to
+a violin." "No, ma'am," is the answer; "wings is a technical term we
+use to express that slender part with the straight cut line at the lower
+end of the sound hole. We shall have to open the violin to repair that
+part properly."
+
+"I hope that will not ruin the instrument," observes the lady. "Can
+you not do the repair without?" "We could, ma'am, if we wished to save
+time and run a risk." "Oh, please don't run any risk with it, now that
+I know that it is a valuable instrument I must ask you to take extra
+pains and do it in your best manner."
+
+"If you would like to see the violin open, I will get my assistant to
+do it now, it will take but a minute or so. Here, James, open this fiddle
+and bring it here again."
+
+There is not much waiting, the upper table has not been very obstinate,
+and James soon reappears with the loose parts, which he hands to his
+chief. The lady, rather eager at first to see if there is anything
+curious about the inside of a violin, rather shrinks away when it is
+brought near. "It is in a very dirty condition," the chief observes,
+"but we shall soon get that all right," he adds, "by giving it a wash."
+
+"But will not wetting it spoil the tone?" the lady asks. "Not in the
+least, ma'am," is the reply. "In fact, it will be improved, as at
+present there is so much grease and filth that the vibration would be
+seriously interfered with. When it is quite clean there will be more
+freedom, and the true character of the tone declared."
+
+The lady having departed, the chief takes the violin parts to the
+workroom. "This is a fine thing," he says to James.
+
+"I thought so too, sir," he replies, "got some fine stuff on it, fiery
+like, nothing the matter with it but those mouse nibblings."
+
+"That will require careful work, James, think you can do it
+sufficiently neat and make the new wood match well?"
+
+"I think so, sir. Some of that old pine that we had sent us last week
+will match thread for thread."
+
+"Well, give it a clean out first, James." This is at once commenced,
+and with the aid of some clean water, a sponge and stubby brush,
+followed by the application of a clean dry rag or duster, the interior
+presents a fairly clean appearance.
+
+"I see you have been careful about the label, James. It was not possible
+to decipher it when smothered with dirt, but we can read it now. Yes,
+what I thought, original ticket without a doubt. Joseph filius. Bring
+me that bottle of benzine and the hog-hair brush." This being done,
+the chief takes the brush wetted with the benzine and carefully brushes
+about the corners and other parts where the grease has refused to come
+away under the ordinary treatment. Each application is followed by a
+wiping of the cloth held in readiness.
+
+"There," he says at last, "it is quite fresh and wholesome. Don't
+suppose Mr. Mouse will go in again."
+
+"Now, James, what do you propose doing? making a clean sweep of the
+ragged parts with the knife or letting in angular portions in the German
+manner?"
+
+"Well, sir, on looking close at it perhaps the best way will be to act
+both ways, cut that part straight through and fit the splinters along
+there."
+
+"Yes," says the chief, "I think that way will save as much of the old
+material, if not more, than any other. Take pains with it and mind the
+small joinings are clean and sharp."
+
+James retires with the upper table to his bench, where the different
+necessary excisions are proceeded with.
+
+The next stage is that of glueing pieces of wood at the back of and
+across the sound holes. The object of this is to get more strength and
+leverage for pressing home the fresh wood to be inserted. From the
+neglect of this precaution many instruments have had cracks and other
+damages caused, making matters worse than before and necessitating
+much more work in rectifying it. After the necessary time, the glue
+being hard and dry enough, James begins the matching of the parts with
+pieces of old wood from the carefully hoarded pile in a box kept for
+the purpose; first one piece, then another is tried, until the right
+one is obtained for each requirement, both in respect of colour and
+matching of the thread or grain. The surfaces to come in contact and
+be fixed are minutely fitted, the larger ones only at present, the
+smaller gaps are left.
+
+All being ready, strong glue is applied to the parts which are to be
+united and they are pressed together, help toward adjustment being
+obtained from the wood glued across.
+
+Being left to dry, and this being complete, the cramps or wedges, as
+may have seemed appropriate, are removed, the cross pieces cut away
+and the glue washed off.
+
+The paring down of the fresh wood to the level of the surrounding parts
+has now to be very carefully done. The adjacent curves must be studied
+and the surfaces of the fresh parts worked until by testing, not only
+by the sight, but passing the finger across, the surface feels as one
+piece.
+
+For the small parts that require levelling, small pieces of glasspaper
+attached to a stick of pine shaped according to requirement will be
+found useful.
+
+The fresh wood will of course be projecting some way beyond the edges
+or course of the line of the sound holes, the exact outline of which
+it is most desirous to continue.
+
+This is about to be attended to by James, who thinks it a small matter
+to continue the line with his sharp knife, but his master happened to
+catch sight of his first strokes and sees his intention in time. "Stop!"
+he calls out, "not another stroke; just take a tracing of the opposite
+or corresponding part of the other sound hole and trace it down, don't
+trust to your eye unless you consider yourself an artist of experience
+and able to actually draw with your knife.
+
+"You must attend to another thing besides the tracing of the contour.
+When you cut up to the line that you take as a guide, you must see that
+you make the walls of the opening at the same angle downwards, and your
+fresh wood in every respect of form an exact continuation of the old
+work."
+
+The repair so far as the wood work is concerned is finished. It has
+now to receive the varnishing and touching up in detail for matching
+so as to arrest as little attention as possible as a repair.
+
+"There are two fiddles, sir, that a party brought here yesterday. They
+seem very far gone; one of them has lost quite a quarter of the upper
+table, it has had a bad smash and the pieces have not been saved."
+
+"Well, James," is the reply, "there is only one course to pursue, that
+is, to put a fresh piece of wood, join it as neatly as possible and
+match the varnish. I think we have a piece of old stuff sent us by an
+Italian dealer that will suit that exactly." The store of odds and ends
+of pine is rummaged over and the piece, with some pencil notes on it
+of date, etc., brought out and compared with the fractured fiddle.
+"Could not be better, James," says the chief. "Now take off that table,
+or what remains of it, and pare the ragged edges at the part near the
+sound hole.
+
+"At that part you had better shave it at an angle from the upper surface
+and make a corresponding start on the fresh wood; they must both fit
+to a nicety, and when so the old wood will overlap the fresh stuff.
+You will take care to have the upper surface of the fresh wood a little
+above the level of the old, to allow of finishing down to a good level
+when the time comes for the final touches."
+
+This is all seen to, the large slice of wood is for the present left
+square at the top, it is thick enough to represent the appearance of
+the slab of wood used by the original maker before the table was cut
+into form. There is some gouging to be done and shaping of the parts
+adjoining the old wood.
+
+It has, of course, been necessary to provide a sort of mould for fitting
+and pressing from above the thin shaved edge of the old material on
+to the new. Precaution, however, is taken to firstly glue the parts
+that are to be brought together at the joint. This will prevent the
+shaved surfaces from slipping when pressure is applied.
+
+These parts of the process having been done and the glue dried
+sufficiently, the under surface is levelled all round as a continuation
+of the under part of the old border.
+
+The table, therefore, can now be laid flat, and should fit well on to
+the ribs and linings as it did before the fracture. James now has
+recourse to the advice of his chief as to the best course to pursue.
+
+"Shall I trace the other side, sir, and mark it down on the fresh wood
+so as to make it balance?"
+
+"Certainly not," answers his chief, "this is what you must do. Lay the
+table on the ribs as if you were about to glue it down, you can let
+it be held in position by a couple of screw-cramps, then, with a lead
+pencil, take as a guide the ribs, holding it so that a mark can be made
+all round representing the projection of the new edging. A short piece
+of a pencil laid flat against the ribs and moved round, would perhaps
+be the most convenient."
+
+James proceeds dutifully to work, marks the edging, and then, after
+removing the screw-cramps, roughly hews away the wood to near the line.
+
+Much care and more delicate manipulation has to be exercised now, or
+the precaution of the pencil line will prove to be next to useless.
+
+Files of different degrees of tooth are employed until quite an even
+contour is obtained and a precise line, the continuation of the pattern,
+is seen.
+
+The next proceeding will be to mark the thickness of the edging all
+round. For this purpose a cut line is better than a mere mark, as the
+cutting up to it is easier and safer. The purfling tool may be regulated
+and adapted in this case, after which the table will be laid flat,
+carefully considered, and the more detailed gouging commenced. A small
+pair of calipers will prove handy for measuring the depth of the
+channelling of the original parts and gouging down carefully until a
+corresponding modelling has been effected.
+
+If the original work is sharply defined and a distinctly shaped border
+is present, then the work must be proceeded with as in the instance
+of making a new copy of a violin.
+
+Some little difficulty may appear when the question of matching the
+purfling arises. The assistant opens a drawer close by, selects a
+likely piece, compares it with that on the violin, and then shows it
+to his chief, who examines it in a similar manner. "Yes," he says, "I
+think that is sufficiently like, in fact, it will not be possible to
+get nearer, it is a bit of that old stuff, is it not, that we have kept
+by for an emergency? Have you got the groove cleanly cut and routed
+out?"
+
+"Yes, sir," is the answer; "I noticed about the depth that would be
+wanted at that little part where the old stuff had been snapped short
+at the fracture."
+
+"Well, that will do, James. Be careful to cut the ragged end with a
+clean angle, doing the same with the fresh stuff--fit the parts
+accurately, and when you insert the purfling see that the end is pushed
+home so that as little as possible is seen of the junction of the two
+ends."
+
+With these injunctions borne in mind, James proceeds to the work.
+Having had some experience in this branch of the repairing art, and,
+further, this being to him a more interesting part than others of the
+proceedings, he at once sets to work.
+
+Having roughly measured the length of the piece of purfling to be
+inserted, he finds that it will be necessary to bend it to the curves
+of the groove made for it. To force it in while in its present condition
+would not do, as it is nearly straight; for, although it has served
+to go round a violin in years gone by, it has almost resumed its old
+condition through the action of the natural damp in the atmosphere.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+REPAIRS TO PURFLING (CONTINUED)--FILLING UP AN OPENING EXTENDING TO
+THE WHOLE LENGTH OF THE VIOLIN--FITTING THE CORE--FIXING IT IN POSITION
+AND RETAINING IT THERE--FINISHING THE SURFACE.
+
+
+Many old Italian violins bear indications of the haste of the maker
+to get the purfling done, and so without the delay of any intermediary
+process the purfling has been pressed in with great risk and
+sometimes an inevitable result of fracture.
+
+In the present instance, the violin having all the evidence of great
+care having been expended on its construction and finish, the repair,
+to be as successful as possible, must be carried out on the same
+principle, every little deviation of curve being well imitated. For
+the bending of the purfling there may be, of course, any number of
+methods. According to the consistency of the material, so the
+management must be.
+
+At present the piece of purfling, having been taken from a portion of
+an old violin bought for the purpose of breaking up and using for
+repairs, is very dry and rather brittle. The light coloured part or
+central portion is of some hard wood that refuses to accommodate itself
+easily to the requirements of the moment; this is found to be the case
+on trying a small portion with the fingers--it goes with a snap on very
+little attempt being made to bend it.
+
+James having met with this kind of thing before, knows more than one
+way of meeting the difficulty. As is often found, a rough and ready
+way is good for a small amount of work such as he has before him.
+
+He takes a candle and lights it. He has always at hand a jar of water
+ready for any damping required in the number of little odd jobs
+constantly occurring. Placing the jar of water within easy reach, he
+dips the purfling into it once and then wipes it with his handy cloth.
+
+Taking the two ends with the fingers of each hand he passes it backward
+and forward near the flame of the candle, using a gentle pressure to
+make it assume a crescent or bow shape. The heat causes the damp to
+evaporate and steam the materials, and the purfling will gradually
+assume the required curve.
+
+When this latter happens to be short or sudden, another dip and heating
+may be necessary.
+
+This being successfully accomplished, recourse is now had to the glue
+pot, a pointed piece of wood is dipped into it, and a small streak of
+glue is laid in the groove. The purfling is now carefully inserted along
+the course, pressed in and left to dry.
+
+After a sufficient time has elapsed, James looks over it, and finding
+all things ripe for finishing, takes a gouge of a size that will suit
+the channelling of the particular model adopted by the maker.
+
+Great care is necessary to shave off but a small portion as the gouge
+is passed along. The latter has a very keen edge, or it will tear instead
+of cut. It is used here and there in contrary direction, as the grain
+of the several parts of the purfling does not run quite level. A curved
+file, and finally a little glasspapering, will complete the matter so
+far. There will be for the finishing of the whole of the fresh wood
+a further process to go through, that is, a slight damping.
+
+This can be done with a small fine grained sponge or a moderately wet
+camel hair brush. This is for the purpose of slightly raising the grain.
+If this is not done at this time the soft part of the grain may show
+its automatic tendency to swell after the final process of varnishing
+has been gone through. When quite dry, fine glasspaper is used to reduce
+the surface to an almost polished level, after which some clear oil,
+having good drying qualities, is brushed lightly but completely over
+all portions of the fresh work.
+
+It will not be absolutely necessary that this should be quite dry and
+hard before proceeding with the varnishing down to the tint of the old
+and surrounding work.
+
+This being a separate and independent branch of the art of restoration,
+will be treated apart hereafter.
+
+For the present we will be content to know that this varnishing, a very
+delicate process in connection with the repair, is undertaken by the
+chief himself, who sets to work at once and in a manner as if it were
+a true labour of love, there being no hurry, but careful time-ignoring
+attention to matching and calculation of effect. Just before settling
+down with colours, essences, solvents and brushes, he gives directions
+to his man James to "finish up the crack or fracture in that old
+'Stainer' lying on the shelf there behind."
+
+When it is taken down from its place of repose, James looks at it for
+a moment and then observes, "Rather an awkward job, this, sir! It is
+more than a crack along the whole length of the fiddle; somebody has
+been at it trying to mend it and made it positively worse. The edges
+are quite apart. You can see through in some places, and in others there
+is a lot of black hard glue."
+
+The chief now has a look over the damaged part and then remarks, "The
+thread of the pine happens to be very straight, and that will lessen
+the trouble."
+
+"Right, sir," is James's rejoinder, "not like that Genoese fiddle that
+we had some time back with the very curly bit of pine that looked as
+if the tree had been growing at the side of a rock and trying to look
+round the corner. Fitting a straight piece along the centre of that
+fiddle was no joke."
+
+"Well, James, wash all that filthy dark glue away, and when quite dry,
+run a thin chisel along each side of the hole, taking fine shavings
+off until the upright walls have a sharp clean edge."
+
+The washing out is at once commenced, and when finished, the upper table,
+which of course had been removed some time back for ascertaining the
+necessary amount of repairing, is placed apart for drying.
+
+While this is in process, another violin is taken in hand. It has a
+different kind of fracture, which it has been thought well for
+appearance sake should be re-opened and made tidy, in fact, obscured
+as much as present skill will allow of.
+
+The fracture, although not one of very common occurrence, is of a kind
+well known to professional repairers. It has been caused by a twist,
+possibly while being handled by some clumsy or heavy-handed repairer
+of olden times, and hastily filled with polluted glue, pressed together
+and left to itself. It is not at right angles with the plane of the
+instrument, but at a very acute one, very little evidence of it,
+possibly none, being seen from the inside.
+
+The first step taken by the repairer is the cleansing and removal of
+all foreign particles likely to interfere with the adhesion of the
+surfaces to be brought into contact. As there is present much grime,
+and this not free from a suspicion of the presence of grease, James
+has recourse to the bottle of benzine, into which he dips a small brush,
+working it backwards and forwards, wiping it on an absorbent rag and
+re-applying the liquid.
+
+This does not take very long; the evaporation being rapid, the wood
+is soon ready for the next stage, which is that of removing the dark
+glue and other foul matters from the irregular surface.
+
+This requires the application of warm water, by means of a stiffer
+implement, used in fact as a small scrubbing brush; the moisture
+between whiles is pressed in and out by the fingers with repeated
+wipings and re-wettings.
+
+After a while, being satisfied that the surfaces of the fracture are
+clean to the desired degree, James allows the wood to partially dry.
+In the meanwhile, he cuts a couple of pieces of wood to fit the back
+and front of the table, so that with folded paper as a pad the parts
+may be pressed together. All being in readiness, fresh strong glue is
+inserted all along the opening, the repeated pressing being kept up
+until he is sure that the glue has penetrated every part. The
+superfluous glue oozing from the inside, after a slight squeeze along
+the course, is lightly wiped off, the moulds applied back and front,
+and the cramps fixed.
+
+Other little odds and ends of repairing have occupied the attention
+of the assistant during the time of waiting for the drying of the
+before-mentioned upper table of the Stainer. This latter being of full
+model, although not resembling the swollen or bolster-like form of many
+imitations of the master, requires special attention with regard to
+fitting in of the fresh wood or core.
+
+The fresh wood must not be bent, or the matching of the grain with the
+old material will be impossible, and the repair when completed will
+be strikingly conspicuous. It must therefore be inserted in such a
+manner that when pared down, the direction or flow of the grain will
+exactly coincide in all respects with the rest of the table. The fact
+must be recognised that although the threads may be perfectly straight
+from end to end, yet they may rise higher at one end than the other
+or not run level with the plane of the table. (Diagram 37.)
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 37, showing half length of core inserted before
+being pared down, and with grain.]
+
+This being duly calculated by James when cutting the piece that is to
+be inserted as a core, the table with its opening extending nearly from
+end to end is placed on an even surface facing upwards, as when on the
+instrument. The core is then tried in the aperture. Perhaps a thin
+shaving or two is found necessary, when finally it is sufficiently
+exact. The next stage is that of getting ready the means of holding
+or pressing all the parts together till dry after glueing. Taking a
+flat piece of wood, perhaps the one just used, and placing the table
+down, a pencil line is traced on the board round the violin table as
+if for the purpose of copying the pattern. Two straight lines are now
+ruled on each side touching the most projecting part of the upper and
+lower curve (Diagram 38.)
+
+[Illustration: DIAGRAM 38.]
+
+On the outside of each line, but touching it, a strip of wood about
+a quarter of an inch square is pegged or nailed down.
+
+The table or plate when placed flat between these two small bars of
+wood, is within an acute angle, and can be held tight or not according
+to the degree of pressure with which it is pushed toward the smaller
+end.
+
+It will at once be perceptible that a trifling pressure forward of the
+table towards the small end will result in the raising of the central
+part and the widening of the opening instead of closing it.
+
+There must be, therefore, some means adopted to counteract this, and
+these are not difficult to fix upon. In lieu of pressing the table
+forward with risk of damaging the part of the border that will come
+in contact with the two fixed bars, it will be carefully tried as to
+fitting the exact position it is to take when glued, that is,
+sufficiently forward in the space between the bars that will only admit
+the table with a slight rise in the arching, the joint or part holding
+the core being in a more open condition as a consequence.
+
+The exact place or point of contact is marked with a soft pencil or
+piece of chalk on border and bar. The table being taken away, the parts
+requiring it will be carefully glued.
+
+Placed in position again, necessary means are taken that the surface
+or plane on each side of the core are quite level with each other; if
+they are not so, they will, after the necessary paring down of the core
+has been completed, cause an ugly, uneven appearance. To prevent this,
+therefore, the parts must be adjusted by the application of the fingers
+on one side or the other, or gently tapped by a piece of wood
+sufficiently heavy until exactness of level is made sure.
+
+There is now necessary a weight to be applied along the whole length
+of the junction for keeping all in position until the glue is quite
+dry and hard.
+
+Any kind of weight may be applied, the smaller and heavier in proportion
+to size the better, as so much more can be seen when several are used
+instead of one and that of larger dimensions.
+
+These being placed in position, the table with its adjusted weights
+is placed away for drying.
+
+When time has elapsed for this to be satisfactorily accomplished the
+table is taken in hand again, the weights lifted off and a slight tap
+at the upper with a piece of soft wood will set it free.
+
+The part of the core now rising above the upper or varnished side of
+the table is pared down very gently, care being taken that the chisel
+does not work into the varnish on either side of the core, and that
+it is not driven against the grain, as by so doing the wood is nearly
+certain to be torn instead of cleanly shaven.
+
+A close examination of the surface is now made, if found quite
+satisfactory, it may receive its final polishing by the application
+of some very fine glass paper wrapped round a piece of cork, with a
+little clear oil dabbed on it. This will give a dead smooth surface.
+If the above directions are carried out with clean and sharp work, the
+line along the table marked by the presence of the core will be so slight
+as to appear little more than the thread of the wood, in the highest
+class of repairing it will be nearly exact.
+
+The part of the core projecting on the under side of the table is easily
+disposed of by a gouge in the same manner as described for the action
+of the chisel on the front.
+
+The operations just described are of a kind that should not be
+undertaken without considerable experience, as, indeed, ought to be
+the case with many other repairs, the requisite dexterity of handling
+not coming at once even with much natural ability.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+REPAIRING UNDERTAKEN BY PEOPLE IN BUSINESS NOT CONNECTED WITH THAT OF
+BOWED INSTRUMENTS--REMOVAL OF A FIXED SOUND POST--FITTING A FRESH PART
+OF WORM-EATEN RIB--BRINGING TOGETHER THE LOOSENED JOINT OF THE BACK
+WITHOUT OPENING THE VIOLIN.
+
+
+We will now move down to the front portion of the premises again, where
+the chief has been pondering over some instruments with damages of
+different kinds and degrees. Some have been sent for repair, but have
+nothing apparently wrong about them. The little note sent with them
+is simply to the effect that "they do not go well" and the owners would
+like them put in order. A tap is given here and there with his knuckles,
+and this kind of test is sufficient in one instance to get an
+acknowledgment from the violin itself that its ribs do not adhere to
+the back as they should. Another betrays no looseness anywhere, and
+there is no fracture perceptible on a close examination; this is put
+aside so that it may be strung up properly, when it will probably give
+out some distinct evidence of internal wrong, if not of some external
+injury, which being fresh and clean is not easily affected by mere
+tapping.
+
+In the midst of his meditations over the different possibilities, a
+gentleman enters accompanied by a young lady, probably his daughter,
+who carries a violin case. He enters upon his subject at once,
+saying:--"I have brought a violin for your inspection, it was left
+behind by a friend who went abroad some time back and he lately wrote
+over saying that my daughter might find it useful, as he had been told
+by his father that it was at one time an instrument with excellent
+sounding qualities. He is not a player and he kept it shut up for a
+long time and seemingly forgot all about it. We of course soon got the
+case from its hiding place, opened it and took the violin out. My
+daughter here found two strings had snapped and put on others. When
+she tried it with her bow, however, most unpleasant sounds came out.
+My daughter proposed that it should be taken to a shop in our
+neighbourhood where she gets her music; she says they are very nice
+people, and so she took it there and they told her 'it would be put
+in order by the next morning,' which of course seemed very prompt. My
+daughter has tried it since it came home, but it seems to have even
+less sound than before."
+
+"Let me have a look at it, please," says our chief. The violin is at
+once taken out of the case by the young lady and handed to him. The
+chief looks over it, turns it about once or twice, and asks: "Did you
+put this into the hands of a repairer who professed any knowledge of
+violins?" The answer is--"Well, the people that my daughter took it
+to said they had intrusted the violin to their best pianoforte repairer,
+who had worked in one of the principal manufactories in London." The
+chief observes: "A piano is very different to a violin, sir; the
+repairer of one has to deal with curved surfaces, and wood of two kinds
+only, the other with flat ones and other woods and metals." "I hope
+the treatment has not ruined the instrument, can it be restored, will
+it be of much value?" says the gentleman. "Well, it is not of much value
+as a musical instrument in its present condition, but when properly
+restored would command a considerable price. The restoration will cost
+some pounds and be a fairly good investment."
+
+"You had better do it and to your best ability," answers the gentleman,
+"and please send it home when done."
+
+The two visitors make their departure and then James is called for a
+moment by his chief, "Hi! James, just look at this bit of repairing."
+
+The assistant takes the violin in his hands, looks over it and laughs.
+"Not trained properly, sir, at mending; what a plaster it has got
+underneath the bridge! and there's a large one underneath the post too;
+there's strength there if nothing else."
+
+"Well, James, we must get both of those out and put something in more
+to the purpose, the gentleman wants it done well and we must make it
+sound properly to please him and his daughter. From the manner in which
+those patches are inserted and their thickness--they are stouter than
+the tables themselves--there would be very little tone. Well I never!
+they've glued the sound post in."
+
+This discovery caused a good laugh from both. "We must have the upper
+table off at once, James," continued the chief. "But how about the post,
+sir?" interposes his assistant; "it looks as if it will hold on tight."
+"Well, you must take a fine chisel and work it in two before you commence
+the opening."
+
+James retires to his corner, and taking up a small chisel stuck in a
+short handle of his own fitting, he inserts it carefully through the
+right sound-hole, chipping the post gradually down one side, then
+turning the violin round on the cushion, he works away at the post
+through the other, and although from the extra distance from this, the
+chisel has a weaker hold, there is less substance to work through, the
+greater part having been worked away at the first attack.
+
+The way is now clear for removing the upper table, which James does
+after some trouble in working his knife along between the edging and
+the upper part of the ribs, in consequence of the glueing having been
+done with a bountiful hand, and the parts pressed together tightly,
+so much so as to show very distinctly where the screw cramps had been
+wound up.
+
+The exposed interior is brought before the gaze of the chief, who looks
+at it for a while, then remarks, "Very bad, but I have seen the like
+often before, and suppose will do so many times again.
+
+"Give it a cleaning, James, they've fastened the plaster on to the dirty
+wood, and I expect the hold is very slight if at all in parts."
+
+"No, sir, I tapped it about, and found some hollow spaces that would
+admit my small knife; the plaster had not been cut evenly, and then
+not pressed equally all over. The back seems about as bad, although
+it being thick does not need any support."
+
+"No, James, the repairers, if we may give them such an honourable title,
+wanted to show that something had been done for the money charged. Give
+the interior a clean out with warm water and sponge, leave some wet
+rags over those plasters, and when the damp has soaked through, you
+can soon get your gouge underneath and pull them off, washing the
+surfaces afterwards."
+
+This having been done as requested, the two parts are again brought
+before the chief, who forthwith takes a pair of calipers; these he
+applies carefully to both upper and lower tables in turn, moving them
+over in all directions. "I declare, James," he then observes, "there
+is no necessity for any patches or plasters anywhere; there is a very
+weak upper rib that has been so knocked about by several mendings, and
+spoilt inside and out, besides being riddled by insects, that we must
+make or fix a fresh piece in its place. Now, this fiddle being worth
+the trouble, you must see if you can make the repair so neat as to be
+almost invisible even when closely examined."
+
+"Well, sir, I'll try at it," is the reply, this being a kind of repair
+that James will take much pleasure in, to show his dexterity of handling
+and clean cutting.
+
+The first thing is to hunt among some pieces of old ribs for a part
+that will match well. This takes some time. At last an old rib is found
+that appears just the thing--a part of it only will be required.
+
+The next requisite is a mould or piece of wood cut exactly to the curve
+of the inside of the rib; this must not be roughly done, or any idea
+of "near enough" being thought of; if it does not fit exactly, then
+the pressure to come against it will be unequal in parts. If cut from
+a little block of soft wood the cutting will not take long, and the
+trouble be amply repaid by the result.
+
+An exterior mould will be as necessary as an interior, and if the
+original rib is of fairly equal substance, the two moulds may be tried
+one against the other, and should fit nicely.
+
+The ragged openings and rotten part of the original rib having been
+carefully examined with regard to the size of the fresh piece to be
+inserted, a line is marked by soft chalk as to the position and extent
+to be covered by the fresh wood. The aperture to admit the fresh piece
+of rib must be determined upon exactly, and be cut with the utmost
+neatness. Before doing this, however, the question must be gone into,
+and settled definitely, as to whether the fresh piece is to be pressed
+on from the outside or from the inside.
+
+The choice must be in favour of the more convenient, or that which will
+be most likely to lead to the best results. As the sides of the aperture
+taken longitudinally must be cut at an acute angle and not upright,
+the convenience of cutting the edges of the opening from the outside
+will be decidedly better and more handy for obtaining the desirable
+sharpness of edge.
+
+As a matter of course, the piece must be tried on again and again until
+it is clearly a good fit all round. When in a satisfactory state it
+will, when tried finally, be elevated a trifle above the surrounding
+wood.
+
+The angle at which the upper and lower portions fit has no need to be
+cut so acutely as at the ends.
+
+Everything being ready, including some strong clean glue, this latter
+will require painting over the surfaces that are to be closed together
+until absorption has ceased, and not before this are the parts to be
+brought home, or the absorption or soaking into the wood will continue,
+leaving no glue for holding the two surfaces.
+
+When quite ready, the interior block of wood or mould will be held in
+position by the hand.
+
+As usual, the piece of paper on the face of the mould will be used for
+preventing the glue holding on to it. The piece of fresh rib is now
+placed in position, and the outer mould (faced with paper, of course),
+applied. The screw cramps are now affixed, tightly wound up, and left
+for drying.
+
+After ascertaining that all the glued parts are perfectly dry and
+therefore hard, the cramps, moulds and paper may be removed. If any
+paper should be found adhering a moistened rag will easily remove it.
+
+The next proceeding will be that of levelling down and removing any
+unevenness, on the outside especially. If the fitting has been very
+accurately effected there will not remain much to do in this line. For
+the inside a piece of glass-paper folded over a curved block of wood,
+or the actual mould that has been in use, will serve the purpose if
+not too large. This can be rubbed backward and forward till the surface
+is level. For the outside a slightly different treatment will be
+preferable, that is, a portion of glass-paper of the finest grain
+placed as before in front of a block of wood. There is no necessity
+for it being a very close fit so long as it is even in surface.
+
+This should have some oil of a drying nature put on the surface, a little
+dabbed on with the tip of the finger will be enough.
+
+A fine surface, after a little passing backward and forward over it,
+adding a little oil now and then, will be obtained.
+
+The advantage of the use of oil is, firstly, the ease in use and the
+smoothness of the surface and absence of harshness, secondly, as it
+will have penetrated the wood to some extent it will prevent the varnish,
+that eventually will have to be applied, from sinking into the pores.
+
+Many otherwise excellent repairs have been spoilt from the neglect of
+this simple precaution; without it, the glass-paper leaves a dry,
+finely torn or raw surface which absorbs very readily the coloured
+varnish that will, in sinking, look much more intense, uneven and
+totally unlike the surrounding old varnish, which, it is most desirable,
+should be as closely as possible imitated.
+
+All these particulars, rules, and precautions, having been carefully
+attended to by James, the instrument is at last brought by him in as
+advanced a state as possible to his master, the latter always reserving
+to himself the final touches or finishing and regulating.
+
+About this time another caller, an amateur in a state of great
+excitement, brings a violin case hurriedly in, and coming up to the
+chief without any ceremony, says, while undoing the buckle of the
+straps binding the leather covering: "Oh, my favourite violin is ruined,
+its back is broken, and I feel sure you can't do it up; it is a Venetian
+Montagnana that I have had so many years, and that you--yes, even
+you--admired. You don't say much as a rule in favour of anything I bring
+you, but you said this was the only good thing I had about me; it is
+past your power to put right again, I am afraid." "Then why did you
+bring it to me," says the chief, "if it is impossible for me to remedy
+the breakage? let me see it."
+
+The case having been nervously opened by the owner, the violin, after
+a glance, is lifted out by the chief, the owner looking on in a state
+of great perturbation. "Please be very careful," he says, as the
+practised hand of the master turns it about, looks at it here and there,
+over one way and then the other. "Why, its back is not broken; where
+is the fracture?"--"Don't you see, all the way down, it is quite loose
+and open?"
+
+Another turn round or so, and the chief exclaims, "Oh, you mean the
+joint of the back is open--that is not broken; I did not see it at first
+as the light was going in the same direction; we can put that right
+again for you."--"Here, James!" he calls out, "just look at this; is
+it past our mending?" James casts his eye over it for a second or two,
+and says, "No sir, I've done up that kind o' thing over and over again."
+Then, turning to the owner, "Two against one, you see."
+
+The amateur looks at the instrument with great earnestness for a moment
+or two, then observes: "You will have, I suppose, to take it all to
+pieces to do that kind of repair, eh?"
+
+"Oh no," replied the chief, "we shall close that up without undoing
+any part of it except taking the strings and sound-post away." At this
+moment he has inserted the post-setter and pushed the post a little,
+which proceeding causes the back to open wider, the mouth of the owner
+opening widely also, accompanied by an increase in the general
+appearance of anguish.
+
+"There now," says the repairer, "just that little extra pressure from
+the sound-post enables us to see how far the opening extends; it is
+not all the way along, and there does not appear to be anything to
+prevent it coming together evenly again."
+
+The chief now dexterously, with the point of the "setter," takes the
+sound-post out, the owner looking on with some amount of astonishment.
+
+"You call in the day after to-morrow, sir, and I hope you will find
+it as right as ever."
+
+These words have a cheering effect on the owner. "You are sure that
+will not be too soon," he observes. "Oh no," replies the other, "we
+shall put three or four studs along the centre, inside, and that will
+prevent it going again."
+
+"But how," rejoins the owner, "are you going to put studs along the
+joint inside without opening the instrument?"--he was getting
+interested.
+
+"Well, you leave that to us, sir, and we will tell you afterwards."
+This was said in consequence of a fear that the amateur would be using
+the time of the establishment, and as a result the amateur and owner
+walked away satisfied.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+INSERTION OF STUDS ALONG THE JOINT INSIDE WITHOUT OPENING THE
+VIOLIN--LINING OR VENEERING A THIN BACK.
+
+
+At the appointed time, not any earlier, the amateur makes his
+appearance, inquiring somewhat anxiously as to whether the violin was
+finished, or more precisely speaking from fear, whether the repairer
+had succeeded in restoring the instrument to playing order? "Oh, yes,"
+is the response, "and goes better than it could have done for some time
+back. You see its complaint has been coming on for some time, beginning
+with a slight opening at the lower part, and continuous playing with
+the strain of tuning up now and then extended it, until the time when
+it became of such magnitude that you could not help observing it. Being
+gradual in its progress, the tone getting worse by gentle degrees, was
+also unobserved by you."
+
+On this, the violin being handed to its owner, a close examination is
+made all over the outside, and through the sound-holes.
+
+"Well, really," the owner at last breaks out with, "it is most
+beautifully done! I should not have thought it possible, and however
+did you manage to get all those little squares of wood ranged in a line
+inside, and you said you would do it without breaking open the violin,
+and--tell me how it was done!"
+
+"Then I will keep my promise if you have patience. It is not a very
+difficult matter to those used to such things; you see the first thing
+was to get the outer part clear of any impurities that would prevent
+the glue from getting a tight hold of the surfaces that are to be held
+in contact; the next, to work some strong glue along the course of the
+joint, this by gentle and regular pressure alternately each side of
+the line, is gradually drawn in, the whole length is then wiped with
+a cloth and pressure applied to keep the joint closed, and the whole
+allowed to dry. When so, the interior is attended to, a clean damp brush,
+small enough to pass down either of the sound-holes, is worked
+backwards for a short time along the joint, just enough to remove the
+slight accumulation of dust and prepare the wood for the reception of
+glue. Then the little squares of sycamore being ready, are pricked in
+the centre with this pointed iron wire, and taken up one by one; on
+each occasion a globule of strong glue is dropped on the under surface.
+
+"The wire with its attachment of stud and globule is carefully passed
+down through the sound-hole, which one must depend much on
+circumstances and light available, being cautiously lowered until the
+little square of wood is exactly over the joint and gently pressed down
+on to it.
+
+"Care is taken, of course, to place it on the exact spot; if not
+accurately in position, a slight push with the same wire or another
+or greater strength is given, and then a little more pressure on the
+top.
+
+"When this is done, others are inserted in the same way, and as far
+along the joint as can be reached with the wires. After having dried,
+the glue which had oozed up round the square will be found to have
+decreased so much as to be but little perceptible--thus you see how
+it was done. Do not try this yourself unless you have become expert
+by long practice in repairing generally, as you may probably find this
+more taxing to your nerves than you may be aware of, besides finding
+it a difficult and dirty job getting any mislaid pieces out again."
+
+This last piece of friendly advice is quite to the taste of the amateur,
+who, being a non-practical man, is wise in abstaining from meddling
+in directions for which he has no natural bent, and unlike the numerous
+tribe of would-be repairers who think that any person who can use glue
+and cut a piece of wood can engage in the restoration of such a small
+instrument as a violin.
+
+Our amateur, when arrived home, naturally enough shows his restored
+violin to his friends, one of whom has been looking at it for some time,
+and at last says: "That's the repairer for me, where does he live? My
+violin is sadly in want of proper attention, and I think it requires
+stronger measures for its cure than yours."
+
+The address is readily given, and the instrument duly taken round to
+our chief and his assistant. The statement having been made as to
+recommendation, after an inspection of the very nice restoration of
+his friend's violin, the new-comer takes out his violin from its case
+and places it before the chief, who turns it over and over, looking
+at each fraction of an inch without seeing much the matter with it.
+
+The owner at last breaks in with the remark that a violin maker residing
+where he lately came from had told him that the instrument would never
+go properly unless the back was re-lined--that was perhaps the term
+used.
+
+The chief then rejoins: "I think the repairer was very likely hitting
+the mark when he said that; this is one of those old violins of the
+Brescian school, which are often too thin in the back for modern usage,
+and there is no other resource but that of lining--or veneering, some
+would call it--the back. If you like I will open it, and ascertain
+whether it is so with this instrument."
+
+Consent is given, and the chief goes to the back of his premises, and
+returns with a much-worn table knife. Sitting calmly down before the
+new arrival, and resting the instrument face downwards on his lap, he
+proceeds with sundry slow but strong thrusts of the knife round the
+junction of the ribs with the upper table; the cracking sounds emitted
+as the knife gradually works its way along are rather trying to the
+owner, who, however, has confidence in the reputation of the
+master-hand at the kind of work. After a little extra pushing here and
+there, and lifting gently to ascertain whether the parting is complete,
+the upper table is at last lifted quite clear of the rest.
+
+The owner at once asks, "Is the back in a very bad state?" "Well," is
+the reply, "it is in such a dirty condition that it is not possible
+to tell.--Here, James, bring me that water and sponge!" These being
+at once brought, with a cloth in addition, the chief at once begins
+bathing the inside, giving a heavier rub in different parts, as some
+appearances suggest the extra treatment.
+
+At last, after some few minutes of this application, the cloth is
+applied, and the interior assumes a cleaner aspect.
+
+"Never being cleaned out since it was made, I should think," is the
+observation, "excepting once," he adds, as his practised eye lights
+on a small, but thick stud resting over a small crack at one side, "and
+that was a very long time ago, possibly a hundred and fifty years."
+"Does it require the 'lining'--I think that is what it was called?"
+"Yes, it will be so much better for it, almost necessary."
+
+The owner soon after departs, and the chief and his assistant proceed
+to work upon the violin. In general condition it happens to be very
+good, the one opening referred to being the time at which the modern
+bar had been attached in place of the very old and small-sized one.
+The fingerboard being old is easily removed by a sudden pull or jerk.
+After further cleaning with the aid of a hog-hair brush, this being
+adapted for getting more completely into the corners, both parts of
+the violin--they have both had a cleaning and looks more wholesome--are
+placed aside to dry.
+
+When this has taken place to the satisfaction of both master and man,
+the back is rubbed over with an oiled rag, the object of this being
+to prevent the mould now to be taken from sticking to it.
+
+Some good plaster of Paris is mixed, and a sufficient quantity placed
+on it till a coating an inch and a half in thickness is produced; this
+amount is necessary owing to the tendency to get out of form or warp
+if too thin, failures having often resulted therefrom.
+
+When well hardened, this mould is lifted off; it comes away easily,
+showing a perfect facsimile in reverse of the back of the violin. This
+is carefully wiped, and any small specks of plaster that may be adhering
+are picked off.
+
+The mould has now to be dried, as it would otherwise--from the large
+amount of moisture within it--undo the back, or any cracks that may
+have been glued up.
+
+Placing in a moderately warm oven is as good a method as any, the natural
+drying by open air, even in sunny weather, being a long process.
+
+After being tested and found to contain no moisture whatever, the mould
+is placed upon a bench, and the surface which has been in contact with
+the curved form of the back receives a slight oiling with a brush. This
+will prevent as much as possible injury to the varnished surface of
+the violin when placed in it. This may be further helped by a sheet
+of soft paper or soft cotton being placed between, when the back of
+the violin is laid in the mould.
+
+Before proceeding further, there will necessarily be the preparations
+made in connection with the piece of veneer that is to be glued to the
+back.
+
+In order that this may be as equally as possible pressed into the shape,
+there must be another mould made; this will be of some soft wood that
+will cut easily into shape, and be made to fit as near as can be to
+the back.
+
+Next a layer or portion of cork about one-eighth of an inch thick, and
+large enough to cover the whole of the veneer, will be required. Some
+repairers would prefer india rubber or other yielding substances,
+which will fit into any unevenness while sustaining great pressure.
+This last will be caused by the press or large cramp, which must be
+very strong.
+
+All the foregoing being ready to hand, the veneer being cut down to
+the amount required, perhaps to a pencilled line marked on it for width
+and length, it will be wetted; being of slight substance, it will soon
+absorb sufficient moisture to remain damp during and over the time the
+other preparations are made.
+
+All being in readiness, the back being laid down accurately in its bed
+of hard plaster of Paris, the cloth or paper having been placed between,
+the cleansed and dried surface of the table is brushed over with the
+strong glue which, if the apartment is of sufficiently high temperature,
+will not coagulate or set, but give time for the brushing of glue on
+one side of the veneer. This is at once placed in position on the glued
+surface of the violin table; it is then covered with some thin, soft
+paper, the cake of cork or india rubber being laid over it. More
+carefully than all, the carved piece of wood that is to be pressed down
+must be exactly in its right place, and above this, other slices, so
+that the pressure may be distributed well, and not merely on one spot.
+
+For this a goodly pile will be of advantage; to be quite scientific
+in its proportion, an imaginary line drawn from the central point of
+the pressure above to the outside or margin of the field of pressure
+at the lowest part, should not be at more than an angle of forty-five
+degrees.
+
+Attention being paid to the foregoing, and the press or large screw
+cramp being already in position, the pressure, which must be great,
+is applied.
+
+The glue will be seen oozing out between the surfaces of the table and
+its veneer; this can be wiped off easily, and save the trouble of
+removal when dry and hard.
+
+Necessarily, a longer time will be consumed in thorough drying and
+hardening in a case like this than in an ordinary repair in which the
+atmosphere can more readily obtain access. When quite ready, the
+pressure and the pieces of wood, paper, cork, or indiarubber can be
+one by one released, and the simple veneer, now firmly attached to the
+lower table of the violin, can have its edges trimmed round with gouge,
+chisel, or scraper, and finally glass-papered to a good finish.
+
+When neatly done, the edging of the veneer will decline gradually in
+thickness, and die off all round.
+
+There is nothing further to be done now, but seeing that the bar is
+right in proportion, position, and fitting.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+THE BAR IN OLDEN TIMES--THE MODERN ONE--THE OPERATION OF FITTING AND
+FIXING THE BAR--CLOSING AND COMPLETION OF THE REPAIRS--VARNISHING OF
+THE REPAIRED PARTS HAVING FRESH WOOD.
+
+
+Much false reasoning upon insufficient premises has at times on and
+off been bestowed upon the subject of the bar and its supposed mysteries.
+Space at command will not allow of a dissertation on this detail of
+the constitution of the violin. A few remarks will perhaps be
+sufficient for present purposes. When violins were first sent forth
+by their inventor, Gasparo da Salo, the bar was sometimes omitted,
+possibly in all the earliest ones, the strain on the upper table being
+then slight as compared with that of the present day--at others it was
+very short and weak. The substance of the upper table was considerable,
+and much over that which the later and modern makers approve of, and
+thus there was a counter-balance.
+
+At the present time still stronger bars are inserted, and very
+frequently without rule or reason. Occasionally a coarse bar will allow
+of good results as regards the emission of the tone, the length and
+thickness happening to be suitable to the proportions in detail of the
+instrument. A weakness at each end of the bar is an oft-recurring cause
+of bad going with regard to the vibrations.
+
+From this we may infer that when the bar was first thought of and
+inserted it was simply with an idea of supporting the part over which
+the third and fourth strings were stretched, and that as the tension
+of the strings became greater in consequence of the rise in the pitch,
+so the bar had to be increased in strength, that is, longer and deeper.
+The discovery or unearthing of an old master in its original condition
+will therefore be followed by the opening and re-barring for the
+emission of the tone according to modern ideas; these may be summed
+up as the getting of the largest amount of tone accompanied by freedom
+of vibration or ring.
+
+As the removal of a defective or weakly bar and its renewal and fixing
+in accordance with the best knowledge of the subject is an operation
+that should be seldom attempted by other than an experienced
+professional repairer, it may be as well to pay another visit to our
+chief and his assistant, James.
+
+After some lapse of time we find on looking in at the establishment
+that there is no perceptible change in the working or general routine;
+violins innumerable have come and gone and still seem likely to do so
+for ever.
+
+The chief has been occupying a few minutes looking through a newspaper,
+not so much in connection with his business, which, as no doubt will
+have long since been perceived, is a private or personal one, he is
+simply keeping up with the times in reading about what is going on
+outside his own little world.
+
+James, notwithstanding his lesser amount of artistic and scientific
+knowledge than the chief, has been steadily improving in his own way,
+that of implicitly following directions put forward for his guidance
+and given with so many axioms, the result of long experience and
+watchfulness. It is a warm day and really heavy work would not be to
+the disposition of either master or man.
+
+Looking through the doorway into the workshop at the back, James can
+be seen sitting as quietly and contentedly as his master in the front.
+He is engaged on some fitting of small pieces into some fractures of
+the upper table of a Stradivari. Having been told to do them neatly,
+cleanly and with every precaution, experience and deft handling of
+tools, he has got these latter into nice cutting order. The finest and
+even semi-transparent shavings will have to come from the fractures
+and the portions of wood to be inserted therein. James has by this time
+acquired considerable neatness in the treatment of "delicate jobs,"
+as he calls such as the present. His tools have had special attention
+in the keenness of their edge and he thinks that when all is finished
+the violin will be as good as new, and very little of the damage done
+while in charge of the owner will be perceptible unless hunted for.
+He argues within himself that the greatest amount of expenditure of
+muscle work and fitting together of ever so many parts has been done
+by himself, and therefore the honour ought to be principally his, in
+fact the fiddle is more of his make than that of old Strad. His
+ruminations are stopped rather suddenly by the voice of the chief, who
+calls out, "I say, James, what about the re-barring of the Maggini that
+Miss Winks left a week back?"
+
+"Well, sir, she called again yesterday, and said she didn't think it
+would be done, because we seemed slow people, but intended to call again
+in three days."
+
+"Perhaps you had better set to work, James. Have you got everything
+ready for placing the bar?"
+
+"Yes, sir, everything except the bar itself, which is not cut to shape
+yet."
+
+"Well, let me see it. Is it of nice straight grain and from the stock
+of that old Italian?"
+
+"Yes, I've picked out a piece that appears to me just the thing; it
+only wants the curve cutting to fit the upper table, and that is quite
+clean and regular without any slips of the tool in cutting the old one
+out, which I think was the original one."
+
+The chief gives two or three glances over the work, his accustomed eye
+being ready to catch any little fault likely to have been made by his
+man.
+
+"That surface, James, for a Maggini, is remarkably even; as often as
+not the gouge marks are left, making a close fit of the bar an
+impossibility, let me see the bar."
+
+The piece of wood is produced; the Maggini being a full fourteen inches
+in length of body, the proposed bar is cut to ten and a half inches
+in length and seems to the chief to be satisfactory.
+
+"You can now go on, James; let me see the bar before you glue it in."
+
+The upper table of the Maggini and the bar are taken away by James,
+who goes at once to work with the necessary preparation for placing
+the bar in position correctly.
+
+With a rather soft lead pencil he marks off the length from each end
+of the table that the bar will occupy, that is, a little over at the
+lower end than the upper, the exact distance from the joint or central
+line, a trifle, perhaps eighth of an inch nearer at the upper part,
+letting the middle or thickest part of the bar be at the spot where
+the foot of the bridge will rest.
+
+After this the bar, at present straight and about three-quarters of
+an inch high all along its course, has marked upon the part that has
+to remain uppermost some indication to the fancy of the operator that
+will keep in mind which end is to be placed at the upper part.
+
+This being done, he commences with a chisel to cut away portions at
+each end, and tries on the surface of the part to be fitted to. After
+two or three times the chiselling has to be more finely done until the
+closest fit possible is obtained; it is then ready for fixing. The bar
+is as yet quite straight along the upper part. With regard to the
+levelling of the bar to the curve of the interior part of the upper
+table, there used to be a custom in the repairing business of "putting
+the bar in with a spring" as it was termed. The repairers always spoke
+of it as "the regular thing to do," but on being asked questions as
+to how much and under what circumstances the "spring" would be best
+one way or the other, became somewhat reticent, possibly from fear of
+being led into some scientific depths from which it might not be easy
+to extricate themselves. James, however, has been taught differently
+in the management of this portion of his work; he having found from
+close examination that the rise of the curving on the outside on the
+bar side was quite high enough, went on with the operation.
+
+Had the bar side been in a sunken condition, his chief would have
+required him to restore the elevation by the wetting process before
+alluded to.
+
+The accessories, glue and cramps being in readiness, two pieces of
+thick hard brown paper are folded together to go over the varnished
+surface of the upper table. This will be quite thick enough, as any
+more will cause a liability to press the bar into the wood when under
+the influence of the damp of the glue. This result is often seen in
+violins that have been through the hands of inexperienced repairers,
+there being an elevation at each end where the bar terminates when the
+violin has been strung up.
+
+Cramps are used of sufficient width for reaching over the border at
+each end and quite on to the end of the bar. James, after his repeated
+trials as to the closeness of the relation of the curve of the bar to
+that of the table, takes it to the chief as commanded, who expresses
+his satisfaction and orders the completing process to be gone through.
+
+The curved surface of the bar is wetted and some glue placed along,
+the part of the table with which it is to be in contact is also wetted,
+but not much. After a few minutes for the glue to soak in, the final
+glueing is done along the course on the table and the curved course
+of the bar; the latter is then placed in position and first one cramp
+at one end is fixed, then the other; the screwing down is very gently
+done, James, from experience, knowing just how much and no more. The
+hard brown paper between the cramps and their padded or corked ends
+prevents any injury to the varnish.
+
+For the central and adjacent portions of the bar to be pressed, James
+uses at times wooden cramps with a longer reach, and treating all parts
+of the bar with gentle but sufficient pressure, being meanwhile careful
+that the pressure is not directed on one side but direct downwards;
+he knows that if this is not strictly attended to, the bar will be
+twisted and when dry, or even finished, will not appear straight but
+curved along its course.
+
+James having seen that this part of the operation has proceeded
+satisfactorily, places the table away to dry, and when so, the cramps
+are removed and the table examined by the chief. All being assumed to
+be satisfactory, James is told to go on with the shaping down of the
+bar, which is done with a chisel held with the bevel downwards, this
+being safer and less likely to slip.
+
+This having been done to the curving desired by the chief, the
+glass-papering to a nice even surface and finish is proceeded with,
+and the operation may be said to be completed.
+
+We now come to the closing down of the upper table. This last is a final
+process that when done clumsily, hurriedly, or in many ways improperly,
+has been the cause of much damage, if not positive destruction, to many
+good or valuable works of the great masters and others.
+
+Before deciding upon the precise moment for this important stage of
+repairing, there should be a most careful investigation of the
+condition of the whole of the interior of the instrument.
+
+Without this there is the possibility of fine splinters of wood, or
+cracks, being left unattended to that may announce themselves when all
+is supposed to be in readiness for the bow, by a jarring, or, when the
+bow is applied, by a buzzing which will take all the knowledge,
+experience and guessing, perhaps more, that can be brought to bear upon
+the matter without any practical result, excepting perhaps that of the
+necessity of re-opening.
+
+If found out before closing down, neighbouring parts should be rigidly
+examined, as a slight, almost invisible fracture, will, on testing,
+be frequently found to be much more extensive than was at first
+suspected.
+
+Gentle tappings may be tried and testings of resistance to bending at
+the same, keeping the light at right angles to enable the slightest
+opening or fracture to show itself and be at once placed under treatment.
+When every test proves the instrument to be sound and ready for closing
+up, preparations may be commenced.
+
+There is probably no one of the different details of repairing that
+gives more evidence than this of the kind of workman engaged upon it.
+
+It may almost be said that this is rarely done as it ought to be in
+the manner that can be described as being good in every way for the
+purpose, and neatly done.
+
+The bad manner of closing has been, more frequently than any other,
+the means of putting the whole instrument out of order, gradually
+distorting, if not actually bringing it to ruin as a work of art, and
+to destruction as a means of producing good musical sounds.
+
+Judging by the ways adopted by many inferior grades of repairers,
+professional and amateur, the closing down of the upper table is
+thought to be a trifling matter and simply that of passing some glue
+on a brush rapidly round where the ribs are to come into contact with
+the table, clapping it down, placing the cramps round, screwing them
+tight, and, if the weather is cold, acting with more rapidity.
+
+Ten minutes may be said to be the average time that this performance
+takes, and in the majority of cases is thought to be a good one.
+
+But not so by a really competent, painstaking repairer. From his view
+this operation is to be one of the most cautiously conducted ones in
+the whole series of joinings in connection with the repairing or
+constructing of the violin.
+
+As with other processes, there is more than one way of doing a thing
+and that well.
+
+I recollect in early days being acquainted with an exceeding dexterous
+amateur in cabinet making, the principal part of whose furniture, in
+a large house, was his own individual and unaided workmanship. He also
+combined with this the making of violins, and of them I have a
+recollection of their exceedingly neat workmanship, being, in fact,
+ahead in that respect of many professional makers of the time. I often
+received from him hints as to the best methods of overcoming many little
+mechanical difficulties.
+
+Once I was telling him about the dexterous manipulation required in
+fixing accurately and swiftly the upper table. There was the difficulty
+of getting perhaps the two end parts in position and fixing with
+sufficient rapidity before the glue had stiffened or set at the other
+parts.
+
+He asked me why I wanted "to do this all at once, instead of a part
+at a time? He never did it."
+
+He then proceeded to show me that the glue might be applied to the two
+end blocks and the corresponding parts of the table that were to be
+affixed, and these cramped exactly and with comparative ease, in their
+proper position. This being done, a very thin worn table knife could
+be used for working in glue at the other parts and the cramping down
+proceeded with as before.
+
+Another way suggested itself to me some time after, which in careful
+hands would be still more adapted for accurate fitting. It is as
+follows:--Having seen that the opposing surfaces or parts that are to
+be affixed to each other are quite level, fit each other, have been
+cleaned and are free from any oiliness or greasy particles, the glue
+is neatly brushed round the parts requiring it, both upper table and
+ribs being treated. The corner and end blocks, if new, will require
+more than one coating, and these to be allowed to dry, as the end of
+the grain is very absorbent.
+
+Assuming that the glue is sufficient in quantity all round, it may be
+allowed to dry.
+
+The upper table can now be tested for a good fit by laying it, and
+noticing whether the marginal projection over the ribs is regular or
+not; in some instances a little humouring or averaging of this
+projection has to be made, especially when the instrument is very old,
+and bears evidence of much trouble under the hands of repairers of
+different degrees of skill, experience and patience.
+
+This being found satisfactory, a slight brushing of thin glue over the
+upper and lower end blocks will be enough before placing the table in
+position and cramping them down.
+
+For the other parts the thin knife will be sufficient, wetted and worked
+between, the cramps being applied as before.
+
+This way of closing up dispenses with all cause for hurry. The exact
+amount of glue can be calculated without danger of over-loading, and
+the next necessary opening for repairs can be effected without the
+least risk of damage to the margin of the upper table. By this method
+there is no occasion for wiping superfluous glue from underneath the
+over-lapping edge, as there will not be any perceptible, or, indeed,
+present, when tidily done.
+
+Sufficient time being allowed for drying--a little longer for the end
+blocks, these being more hidden and slowly affected by the
+atmosphere--the cramps may be removed.
+
+As a final process, the varnishing over the parts that have been
+repaired may be touched upon.
+
+The success of this so much depends upon the natural talent of the
+operator for matching colours and mixing of different gums for
+obtaining as close as possible resemblance to the surrounding work,
+that any hard and fast rules concerning it cannot be laid down.
+
+An alcoholic mixture is almost invariably used for the covering of raw
+repairs, time scarcely ever being available for the use of an oil
+varnish.
+
+The most commonly used basis is a lac varnish. The ease with which this
+is dissolved and manipulated is a temptation to use it at times when
+it would be the least desirable for the imitation of old varnish. One
+great fault in connection with it is its retaining a glare on the
+surface when hardened, and the undesirable aspect is given of polished
+spots where repairs have been going on. There is only one way of
+counteracting this--by mixing other gums or resins that have less or
+but little glare when hard. Those of a very astringent quality should
+be avoided, as when dry their pulling power or contraction is very great,
+and a cracked surface not at all like the rich fused appearance of many
+of the old masters, but dry and uninteresting, will make itself too
+evident.
+
+By a carefully-calculated mixture of soft and hard gums, with a little
+transparent colouring matter when necessary, a very good if not highly
+successful imitation of the surrounding work can be accomplished, such
+as will prevent the repair "catching the eye" too soon, for it must
+do so eventually when hunted for. The density of colouring and
+thickness of the principal component parts must always be studied, as
+the same depth of tint by a very thin layer as that of a thick one will
+not have the same effect, and one or the other, when making a contrast
+with the adjacent old surface, will be conspicuous as a failure.
+
+A few hints may be acceptable as to material and the management of it.
+We will assume, for instance, that a portion of the upper table of a
+rather deep brown-red old master has been repaired, and a slice of
+comparatively light coloured or new wood has been inserted as a
+necessity, the grain as a matter of course having been matched to the
+best of the ability of the repairer.
+
+The first step taken will be that of putting a nice clean even surface
+over the fresh wood, and in such a manner, that on passing the hand
+or finger over it, no lumps, edges, or rough spots are felt. Having
+brushed the dust or powdered wood away, the colour of the wood will
+have to be lowered or subdued, otherwise the whiteness will obtrude
+itself and stare through any carefully selected varnish. This, for good
+effect, will be found advisable with the repairing of any old
+instrument.
+
+The precautions to be taken at this stage are respecting the quality
+or disposition of the stain (as we may call it). The stains ordinarily
+sold for colouring wood are quite useless for present purposes, as they
+are absorbed between the threads, leaving these by contrast very light
+and the reverse of what is desirable.
+
+A very weak solution in water of bichromate of potash will lower the
+colour sufficiently for most purposes, and when quite dry the wood will
+(having swelled with the moisture) require the fine glass-papering
+again, after which, the next stage can be proceeded with.
+
+The solution of nitric acid in water should be avoided, as, although
+giving a fairly good lowering of the tint, it destroys the soft parts
+of the wood, and, further, causes an odour that may cause annoyance
+to the musician and suspicion to the expert.
+
+Another solution may be recommended, that of the black liquorice, which
+is a transparent brown, and naturally hard. Judgment will have to be
+exercised in the management of either of the above solutions that they
+are not put on too heavily.
+
+The staining being effected, a slight coat of a diluted or light tint
+of the upper or deeply coloured varnish may be painted over and left
+to dry.
+
+If time is not an important item for consideration, a turpentine
+varnish may be applied.
+
+An excellent first colouring can be effected with the transparent
+preparation of gamboge. This material has for long, perhaps always,
+been in request for coloured varnish, as it can be used with (after
+due preparation) either alcohol, turpentine or oil. If dissolved in
+the last, the drying will take so long as to be practically useless
+to the repairer. The turpentine solution is more rapid, but not
+sufficiently so for the restorer under ordinary circumstances.
+
+It will be therefore plain that an alcoholic solution of gums or resins
+will have to be relied on for obtaining the best results when time is
+limited.
+
+The solution of gamboge in alcohol is, when used alone, too weak or
+insufficient in body; it is therefore advisable to incorporate with
+it some other material of a resinous or gummy nature, but such as will
+not impair the transparency. Among the most useful are the bleached
+or white shellac. This, as it leaves the manufactory, is not always
+in a condition for immediate use by the restorer; it should be washed
+in water and then dried well, pounded up and placed in a bottle with
+about four-fifths of alcohol; after remaining in solution for some days
+the clear portion can be poured into another bottle and retained for
+use.
+
+This, when used alone in its colourless condition, will possibly have,
+when dry, too much glare upon its surface, but the colouring matters
+put into it may oppose this sufficiently.
+
+The use of a little gum guacum in solution will be found occasionally
+advantageous; this gum is fairly hard and will lower the colour and
+prevent too much of an approach to gaudiness, that is, if a highly
+coloured varnish has been found necessary. When it is desirable to
+dispense with lac of any kind in the varnish, other materials can be
+found that will perhaps answer the purpose as well, if not better; a
+solution of benzoin has no colour sufficient in itself and therefore
+may be used as a priming or mixing with the gamboge or with dragon's
+blood if that is desirable; the latter, like the gamboge, requires
+something to give it body.
+
+Dragon's blood will soon let the operator know that its power of
+colouring to a staring degree will require suppression. To lessen its
+strength the following may be taken as an excellent means, and will
+reduce the violence _ad libitum_. With a lighted candle, wax for
+preference, smoke a piece of clean glass, and with a camel hair brush
+remove the black and stir it carefully with the coloured varnish. Care
+must be taken that too large a quantity is not put in, or an unpleasant
+tone, even blackness, will be the result.
+
+With regard to the strength of the red, the same precautions must be
+taken: on comparing the varnish of a very red old master of Italy, say
+a Landolphi, with some made with a fairly strong solution of resin and
+dragon's blood, the violence of colour in the latter will be very
+apparent. At a little distance off the old master will look very modest
+while the other will seem coarse and vulgar.
+
+For softening purposes a very small quantity of gum thrus may be used,
+too much will result in tackiness.
+
+For hardening, sandarac has its place and usefulness, although, as with
+the naturally soft gums and resins which return to their original
+condition after the solvent has evaporated, great care must be taken
+to use a very small proportion.
+
+A mixture of sandarac and shellac will result in an extremely hard and
+almost insoluble varnish, a very undesirable covering for a musical
+instrument of any kind as it wears badly, that is, suddenly and harshly
+with a rough fractured edge, instead of the gentle thinning-away under
+usage, seen with a delicate yielding material.
+
+Acroydes is an Australian "grass gum," with very little recommendation,
+as in any considerable amount, it impairs the transparency of the other
+gums with which it may be mixed.
+
+For a brown colour, a little burnt sugar will give a good tint, although
+too much will spoil the consistency of the other ingredients, and the
+whole will be easily affected by damp. Aloes, of which there are several
+kinds, have been used as a colouring ingredient, but the results are
+not on the whole to be considered as good.
+
+Of the different lacs, or as it ought to be termed, condition of the
+resin, as they are all from the same source, seed lac and garnet lac,
+in proportion with other resins, will be found to have considerable
+colouring matter and requiring very little in addition.
+
+For our present purposes, those of varnishing fresh parts of injured
+violins, the above mentioned component materials will be found, when
+in good proportion, according to the experience of the operator, to
+be nearly all that would be desirable in imitating the surrounding
+work.
+
+There is nothing that can be suggested to enable a careless or
+incompetent repairer to achieve good results without care or
+calculation, and these two are an absolute necessity when the repair
+and restoration of a violin at all worthy of the name is the subject
+in hand. Innumerable effects may be obtained by changing the proportion
+of groundwork or priming, and top or coloured varnish. As the
+celebrated old Italian varnish was not one kind but very many different
+kinds, it is more than probable that the different results obtained
+by the celebrated liutaros consisted to a greater extent in the manner
+of the application than any wonderful quality of material. Of this
+subject much might be written which would fill many times over the
+capacity of our present volume.
+
+A few words more may be said in conclusion regarding the varnishing
+of new work on old violins; it must not be supposed that for the
+imitation of the surrounding work an exact repetition of the old
+Italian process with the identical substances used by the liutaros
+would be absolutely necessary for perfect or near success; it must be
+borne in mind that old varnish near the spot with its partial decay,
+probably from many causes, has to be imitated, and that what would be
+a great success with regard to a small space, might in all probability
+prove a signal failure when the whole instrument is so treated.
+
+As a final stage, a freshly varnished portion (and over newly inserted
+wood), will require a little rubbing down (as it is termed); this may
+be done with some of the finest and worn glass-paper, finely ground
+pumice and oil, with a last turn of tripoli powder or rotten stone with
+oil. This should be done only when the varnish is quite dry and hard.
+
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+ADVERTISEMENTS.
+
+
+
+
+FOURTEENTH YEAR OF ISSUE.
+
+_The Largest Circulation in the World of any paper amongst Violinists_.
+
+THE STRAD
+
+_A Monthly Journal for Professionals and Amateurs of all Stringed
+Instruments played with the Bow_.
+
+Published on the First of every Month. Price 2d., Annual Subscription,
+Post Free, 2s. 6d. For the Colonies and Abroad. 3s.
+
+THE STRAD is the only recognised organ of the string family and has
+subscribers in every country of the civilised world. Our circulation
+has increased to so great an extent that we are enabled to engage as
+contributors
+
+THE LEADING WRITERS in the VIOLIN WORLD.
+
+THE STRAD contains technical articles by the leading artists.
+
+THE STRAD, in the answers to Correspondents column, gives minute
+information by Experts on every detail connected with the Violin.
+
+THE STRAD gives all the important doings of Violinists at home and
+abroad all the year round.
+
+THE STRAD gives early critical notices of all important New Music for
+Stringed Instruments, with numbers to show the grade of difficulty of
+every piece.
+
+The following serial articles now appearing:
+
+Joseph Guarnerius. By HORACE PETHERICK.
+
+This series of articles contains a minute critical analysis of this
+great maker's work, and the author claims to have discovered in Andreas
+Gisalberti (a maker almost unknown at the present day), the teacher
+of Joseph Guarnerius, a conclusion arrived at after the most convincing
+evidence, which he puts forward in a very able and readable manner.
+Full page illustrations of violins by Joseph Guarnerius and Andreas
+Gisalberti are given.
+
+Selected Violin Solos and How to Play them. By BASIL ALTHAUS, F.C.V.
+Illustrated with music examples.
+
+Specimen Copy, 2-1/2d., Post Free.
+
+All Subscriptions, Advertisements, etc., to be addressed to the
+Manager, HARRY LAVENDER, 3, Green Terrace, Rosebery Avenue, London,
+E.C.
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. I.
+
+_Crown 8vo., Cloth, 2/6, Post Free, 2/9._
+
+_"THE STRAD" LIBRARY EDITION is the only Authorised Edition of_
+
+Technics of Violin Playing
+ON
+JOACHIM'S METHOD
+BY
+CARL COURVOISIER,
+With Folding Plates, containing Fifteen Illustrations.
+
+LETTER FROM DR. JOACHIM [COPY]
+
+MY DEAR MR. COURVOISIER: I have read the book on Violin Playing you
+have sent me, and have to congratulate you sincerely on the manner in
+which you have performed a most difficult task, _i.e._, to describe
+the best way of arriving at a correct manner of playing the violin.
+
+It cannot but be welcome to thoughtful teachers, who reflect on the
+method of our art, and I hope that your work will prove useful to many
+students.
+
+Believe me, my dear Mr. Courvoisier, to be most faithfully yours,
+JOSEPH JOACHIM.
+Berlin, November 3rd, 1894.
+
+The New and Revised Edition of "Technics of Violin Playing," issued
+by THE STRAD, is the only authorised edition of my work. The several
+English Editions which have all appeared without my knowledge are
+_incomplete_ and _faulty_.
+
+CARL COURVOISIER.
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. II.
+
+_Crown 8vo., Cloth, 2/6, Post Free, 2/9._
+
+HOW TO STUDY THE VIOLIN
+By J. T. CARRODUS.
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+Strings and Tuning. The Bow and Bowing. Faults and their Correction.
+Scales and their Importance. Course of Study. Advice on Elementary
+Matters. Concerning Harmonics, Octaves, etc. Orchestral Playing. Some
+Experiences as a Soloist. With full page portraits of Carrodus, Molique,
+Paganini, Spohr, Sivori, De Beriot, Blagrove and Sainton, and a
+photo-reproduction of Dr. Spohr's testimonial to Carrodus.
+
+
+"An interesting series of articles 'How to Study the Violin,' which
+Carrodus contributed to THE STRAD, and completed only a week or two
+before his death, have now been collected in cheap book form. The
+technical hints to violin students, which are practical, plainly
+worded, and from such a pen most valuable."--_Daily News_.
+
+"But a few weeks before his sudden death the most distinguished of
+native violinists completed in THE STRAD a series of chats to students
+of the instrument associated with his name. These chats are now
+re-issued, with a sympathetic preface and instructive annotations. All
+who care to listen to what were virtually the last words of such a
+conscientious teacher will recognise the pains taken by Carrodus to
+render every detail as clear to the novice as to the advanced pupil.
+Pleasant gossip concerning provincial festivals at which Carrodus was
+for many years 'leader,' of the orchestra, ends a little volume worthy
+a place in musical libraries both for its practical value and as a
+memento of the life-work of an artist universally esteemed."--_Daily
+Chronicle_.
+
+"It is surely, hardly necessary to direct the attention of students
+to the unique value of the hints and advice given by so experienced
+and accomplished a virtuoso as the late Mr. Carrodus, so that it only
+remains to state that the 'Recollections' make delightful reading, and
+that the book, as a whole, is as entertaining as it is instructive.
+The value of the brochure is enhanced by an excellent portrait of Mr.
+Carrodus, as well as of a number of other violin worthies, and the
+printing, paper, and get up generally are good as could possibly
+be."--_Musical Answers_.
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. III.
+
+_Crown 8vo., Cloth 2/6, Post Free 2/9._
+
+THE BOW
+Its History, Manufacture and Use
+BY
+HENRY SAINT-GEORGE.
+With Full Page Illustrations (exact size) by Photo Process.
+
+
+MONS. EMILE SAURET writes--"I have read it with great interest, and
+think that it supplies a real want in giving musicians such an excellent
+description of all matters referring to this important instrument."
+
+SIGNOR GUIDO PAPINI writes--"Thanks so much for your splendid and
+interesting book. You are quite successful and all the artists and
+amateurs are indebted to you for a so exact and correct '_Texte_' on
+the subject."
+
+ADOLF BRODSKY writes--"I am delighted with the book and find it very
+instructive, even for those who think to know everything about the bow.
+It is very original and at times very amusing. No violinist should miss
+the opportunity to buy it."
+
+THE TIMES.--"A useful treatise on the Bow, in which the history,
+manufacture and use of the bow are discussed with considerable
+technical knowledge."
+
+DAILY TELEGRAPH.--"To the student there is much of interest in the work,
+which has the advantage of being copiously illustrated."
+
+DAILY NEWS.--"This book seems practically to exhaust its subject."
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. IV.
+
+_Crown 8vo., Cloth, 5/-, Post Free, 5/4._
+
+CELEBRATED VIOLINISTS: PAST AND PRESENT,
+_Translated from the German of_
+A. EHRLICH,
+_And Edited with Notes and Additions by_
+ROBIN H. LEGGE.
+_WITH EIGHTY-NINE PORTRAITS_.
+
+
+PRESS NOTICES.
+
+"Those who love their fiddles better than their fellows, and who
+treasure up every detail that can be found and recorded about their
+favourite and cherished players, will not fail to provide themselves
+with a copy of this book."--_Musical Opinion_.
+
+"This book of 280 pages is a most interesting and valuable addition
+to the violinist's library. It contains 89 biographical sketches of
+well-known artists, ancient and modern, of all nations. This is not
+intended to be a perfect dictionary of violinists; the aim of the Editor
+of the present volume being merely to give a few more up-to-date details
+concerning some of the greatest of stringed instrument players, and
+we must concede that no name of the first importance has been omitted.
+Germany is represented by 21 names, Italy by 13, France by 10, England
+by 4, Bohemia by 8, Belgium by 7, and the fair sex by seven well-known
+ladies, such as Teresina Tua, Therese and Marie Milanollo, Lady Halle,
+Marie Soldat, Gabrielle Wietrowetz, and Arma Senkrah. Altogether this
+is most agreeable reading to the numerous army of violinists, both
+professionals and amateurs, and after careful examination we can find
+nothing but praise for this translation into English of a book well
+known on the Continent."--_The Piano, Organ and Music Trades Journal_.
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. V.
+
+_Crown 8vo., Cloth, 2/6, Post Free, 2/9._
+
+TECHNICS OF VIOLONCELLO PLAYING
+BY
+E. VAN DER STRAETEN.
+COPIOUSLY ILLUSTRATED.
+
+
+_Copy of Letter received by the Author from the great 'cellist,
+SIGNOR ALFRED PIATTI._
+
+Cadenabbia, Lake of Como, March 9th, 1898.
+
+DEAR SIR,--I received the book you kindly sent me on "The Technics of
+Violoncello Playing," which I found excellent, particularly for
+beginners, which naturally was your scope. With many thanks for kindly
+remembering an old ex-violoncello player.
+
+Believe me, yours sincerely,
+ALFRED PIATTI.
+
+_Copy of Letter received by the Author from the eminent 'cellist,
+HERR DAVID POPPER._
+
+Budapest, February 22nd, 1898.
+
+DEAR SIR,--In sending me your book on "The Technics of Violoncello
+Playing" you have given me a real and true pleasure. I know of no work,
+tutors and studies not excepted, which presents so much valuable
+material, so much that is absolutely to the point, avoiding--I might
+say, on principle--all that is superfluous and dispensable. Every
+earnest thinking violoncello student will in future make your book his
+own and thereby receive hints which will further and complete the
+instructions of his master.
+
+I congratulate you and ourselves most heartily on the new violoncello
+book. With kind regards, Yours most sincerely,
+DAVID POPPER.
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. VI.
+
+_Crown 8vo., Cloth, 2/6, Post Free 2/9._
+
+VIOLIN PLAYING
+BY
+JOHN DUNN
+
+CONTENTS
+
+INTRODUCTORY--Qualities indispensable to the ideal Violinist--Hints
+on the Choice of a Teacher--Some Tricks of pretending professors
+exposed.
+
+ON THE CHOICE OF A VIOLIN AND BOW--Advice regarding general adjustment
+and repairs.
+
+ON THE CHOICE OF STRINGS--Stringing the Instrument and keeping the Pegs
+in Order.
+
+ON THE GENERAL POSTURE--The manner of holding the Violin and Bow as
+accepted by the leading artists of the day.
+
+ON FINGERING GENERALLY--The various positions--Scales
+recommended--The Modern Orchestral "Principal" or (so-called) Leader.
+
+ON GLIDING--Special Characteristics of some of the most Eminent
+Players.
+
+DOUBLE STOPPING--The main difficulty in Double Stopping--How to gain
+independence of Finger.
+
+BOWINGS--Smooth Bowings--Solid Staccato--Spiccato--Spring
+Bow--Mixed Bowings.
+
+TONE PRODUCTION--Character of Tone--Rules and Conditions necessary to
+produce a good tone--Style and Expression.
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. VII.
+
+_Crown 8vo., Cloth, 2/6, Post Free, 2/9._
+
+Chats to 'Cello Students
+BY
+ARTHUR BROADLEY
+
+
+"Musicians, devotees of the 'cello in particular, will welcome the
+latest volume of the 'Strad Library,' 'Chats to 'Cello Students,' by
+Arthur Broadley.... Mr. Broadley not only knows what he is talking
+about, but has practised what he says. From the choice of an instrument
+to finished delivery and orchestral playing, 'Chats to 'Cello
+Students' leaves nothing undiscussed. The treatment is simple and
+practical. The exhaustive chapter on 'bowing' should be an invaluable
+aid to students. In the last chapter of his book, 'On Delivery and
+Style,' Mr. Broadley has given a lucid expression to a subject which
+has sadly needed voicing."--_The Tribune, Nuneaton_.
+
+"Is a brightly written little volume filled with practical information
+for those who seek to bring out the wealth of expression of which the
+violoncello is capable. The instruction is presented in homely,
+common-sense fashion, and there are upwards of fifty examples in music
+type to illustrate the author's meaning."--_Lloyd's Weekly_.
+
+"Every kind of bowing and fingering, the portamento, harmonic effects,
+arpeggios and their evolution from various chords, are all ably treated,
+and the work concludes with a few remarks on orchestral playing which
+are of especial interest."--_Musical News_.
+
+"As a writer on the technique of his instrument Mr. Broadley is known
+all over the world, perhaps his most successful work being a little
+book published by THE STRAD, 'Chats to 'Cello Students.'"--_The
+Violinist_.
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. VIII.
+
+_Crown 8vo., Cloth, 2/6, Post Free, 2/9._
+
+ANTONIO STRADIVARI
+BY
+HORACE PETHERICK
+_Of the Music Jury, International Inventions Exhibition, South
+Kensington, 1885; International Exhibition, Edinburgh, 1890; Expert
+in Law Courts, 1891; Vice-President of the Cremona Society_.
+ILLUSTRATED BY THE AUTHOR.
+
+
+"This is the history of the life-work of the great Italian stringed
+musical instrument maker.... There is a most interesting analysis of
+Stradivari's method of mechanical construction which again is
+illustrated by original drawings from the many Strads which it has been
+Mr. Petherick's privilege to examine. All lovers of the king of
+instruments will read this delightful little volume."--_Reynolds_.
+
+"Among makers of violins Stradivari perhaps occupies the premier
+position, and this account of his work, designs, and variations in
+finish of details will afford pleasure to many readers."--_Morning
+Post_.
+
+"This is a monograph which all students of the violin will be happy
+to possess. The author is a connoisseur and expert, and his account
+of the great Cremonese master and his life-work, is singularly well
+and clearly told, whilst the technical descriptions and diagrams
+cannot fail to interest everyone who has fallen under the spell of the
+violin.... Mr. Petherick traces the career of Stradivari from his
+earliest insight into the mysteries of the craft to his highest
+achievements. Numerous illustrations lend attraction to the volume,
+not the least being a view of Stradivari's atelier, from a painting
+by Rinaldi, the sketch of which was made on the premises."--_Music_.
+
+"Mr. Petherick is well known in the musical world as a violin expert
+with a special knowledge of the instruments made by the Cremonese
+master, whose biography he has here given us. He tells us how the master
+worked, what his pupils did, and where their work differs from that
+of their preceptor. In fact, the volume is as much a dissertation on
+the violins of Stradivari as a biography of the master, and is full
+of deeply interesting matter."--_Lloyds_.
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. IX.
+
+_Crown 8vo., Cloth, 5/-, Post Free, 5/4._
+
+VIOLIN MAKING
+BY
+WALTER H. MAYSON,
+With Thirty-one Full-page PHOTO ETCHINGS,
+Illustrating the process of Violin-making in every stage--from the
+rough slab of wood to the finished Instrument.
+
+The text is written by an Actual Violin Maker, in a very clear and lucid
+style.
+
+
+"'Popular lecture' style, with photographic illustrations."--_The
+Times_.
+
+"A feature of the book is the clearness of the
+illustrations."--_Morning Post_.
+
+"Describes a very fascinating art from start to finish."--_Morning
+Leader_.
+
+"This new booklet, on how to make a violin, is an admirable exposition
+of methods. Mr. Mayson avoids learned terminology. He uses the simplest
+English, and goes straight to the point. He begins by showing the young
+learner how to choose the best wood for the violin that is to be.
+Throughout a whole chatty, perfectly simple chapter, he discourses on
+the back. A separate chapter is devoted to the modelling of the back,
+and a third to its 'working out.' The art of sound-holes, ribs, neck,
+fingerboard, the scroll, the belly. Among the illustrations is one
+showing the tools which the author himself uses in the making of his
+instruments. To learners of the well-known Manchester maker's delicate
+art we commend this little volume."--_Daily News_.
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. X.
+
+_Crown 8vo., Cloth, 2/6, Post Free, 2/9._
+
+(DEDICATED, BY PERMISSION, TO DR. JOSEPH JOACHIM)
+THE VIOLIN MUSIC OF BEETHOVEN,
+Critically discussed, and Illustrated with over
+FIFTY MUSICAL EXAMPLES,
+BY
+J. MATTHEWS.
+
+The book contains analytical and historical notes upon the Chamber
+Music of Beethoven, in which the violin takes part as a solo instrument,
+with some account of the various editions of the principal works;
+Beethoven's method of working, as shown by his Sketch Books, etc. It
+is dedicated to Dr. JOACHIM, who has furnished some notes respecting
+the stringed instruments possessed by Beethoven.
+
+
+Extract from Author's Preface:--
+
+"Young students often suppose that they ought to admire every work
+which proceeds from a great genius; an attempt therefore has been made
+to convey some idea of the relative art-value and importance of the
+various compositions discussed in these pages. For between the best
+work of any man and his least inspired, there is a wide difference.
+Certainly nothing annoyed the great master more than to hear his least
+mature works praised, especially at a time when many of his greatest
+creations were too little studied to be understood save by a few."
+
+
+"Mr. John Matthews--dealing with Beethoven's music in pleasant fashion,
+and at not too great length--gives an historical account, and in many
+instances short analyses, with illustrations in music type, of
+Beethoven's works for this instrument, and particularly the sonatas
+(to which considerable space is devoted), the trios, the quartets, and
+other compositions in which the master employed the violin. The book
+will be found by amateurs both interesting and instructive."--_Daily
+News_.
+
+
+
+
+"THE STRAD" LIBRARY, No. XI.
+
+_Crown 8vo., cloth, 157 pages, 2s. 6d., Post Free, 2s. 9d._
+
+Advice to Pupils & Teachers of the Violin,
+BY
+BASIL ALTHAUS.
+CONTAINS OVER 200 MUSIC ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+STRONGLY RECOMMENDED BY AUGUST WILHELMJ AND GUIDO PAPINI
+
+
+_London, March 18th, 1903_.
+
+DEAR MR. ALTHAUS,
+
+I read your book "Advice to Pupils and Teachers of the Violin" with
+great interest, and find it very useful. Hoping your book will meet
+with the success it deserves.
+
+I am, yours sincerely,
+AUGUST WILHELMJ.
+
+_London, Feb. 19th, 1903_.
+
+DEAR MR. ALTHAUS,
+
+I have read with interest your admirable book, "Advice to Pupils and
+Teachers of the Violin." I have no hesitation in recommending it as
+an indispensable work to all aspiring violinists and teachers. Your
+remarks on the acquirement of the various bowings, with the many
+musical examples, are excellent. I know of no work on this important
+subject so explicit and exhaustive. Wishing your book the great success
+it deserves.
+
+Believe me, yours sincerely,
+GUIDO PAPINI.
+
+"I have read the 157 pages that go to form the book in question, and
+can say, without any misgiving, that Mr. Althaus has successfully
+achieved what he set out to do."--_Musical Standard_.
+
+"The practical and lucid explanations given are assisted by numerous
+illustrations."--_Reynold's Newspaper_.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Repairing & Restoration of Violins, by
+Horace Petherick
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RESTORATION OF VIOLINS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 26878.txt or 26878.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ http://www.gutenberg.org/2/6/8/7/26878/
+
+Produced by Ron Swanson
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.